Slo Abb Rupnieciskie Automatsledzi Serija Tmax XT PDF

SACE Tmax XT.
New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A

Contact us
ABB SACE The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve
1SDC210033D0201 – 03/2010 – 7.000 – CAL

the right to modify the contents of this document on the
A division of ABB S.p.A. basis of technical development of the product, without
L.V. Breakers prior notice.
Via Baioni, 35 © Copyright 2010 ABB.

24123 Bergamo All rights reserved.
Phone: +39 035.395.111

Fax: +39 035.395.306-433
www.abb.com
Technical catalogue - Preliminary
SACE Tmax XT
New low voltage moulded-case
circuit-breakers up to 250 A
Construction Characteristics 1
The SACE Tmax XT Ranges 2
Accessories 3
Characteristic Curves and

Technical Information 4
Overall dimensions 5
Wiring Diagrams 6
Ordering codes 7
Glossary 8
1SDC210033D0201
New SACE Tmax XT.
Simply XTraordinary.
ABB SACE is proud to present you the result of a long and

intense research and development project: the new SACE Tmax
XT up to 250A - ABB SACE’s new family of moulded-case
circuit-breakers.
2
Today a highly advanced range of circuit-breakers has been
brought out, with unparalleled versatility of use and able to
solve all installation problems brilliantly.
You can find the new SACE Tmax XT in the three-pole and
four-pole, fixed, plug-in and withdrawable versions, fitted with
the very latest generation thermomagnetic and electronic trip
units, with the possibility of interchangeability. The new SACE
Tmax XT set up a new technological standard and leave
you free to think up and build installations with extraordinary
performances. An extraordinary demonstration of ABB SACE’s
innovation capability.
Extraordinary latest generation electronics. Extraordinary
coverage of all plant requirements. Extraordinary
performances in compact dimensions.
Extraordinary simplicity of installation and putting into service.
Extraordinary range of accessories available.
New SACE Tmax XT. Simply XTraordinary.
3
New SACE Tmax XT.
XTraordinary completeness of range.
Here are the 4 new SACE Tmax XT frames for you:

– the small XT1 up to 160A;
– the high-performing XT2 up to 160A;
– the reliable XT3 up to 250A;
– the powerful XT4 up to 250A.
4
The new SACE Tmax XT go everywhere and fear no tests frames. To say nothing of the new and large number of
as they are made to respond successfully to all plant dedicated accessories available, even for special applications.
engineering requirements, from the standard ones to the most All that remains is for you to choose: XT1 and XT3 for
technologically advanced ones, thanks to the extraordinary building standard installations with ABB SACE’s unquestioned
fullness of their range. A complete offer up to 250A for reliability and safety, whereas XT2 and XT4 for building
distribution, for motor protection, for generator protection, for technologically advanced installations with top of market
oversized neutral, as switch-disconnectors and for any other performance. New SACE Tmax XT, for any choice, always and
needs. A new range of both thermomagnetic and electronic in any case simply extraordinary.
protection trip units, interchangeable right from the smallest New SACE Tmax XT. XTreme protection.
5
New SACE Tmax XT.
XTraordinary advanced electronics.
Welcome a totally renewed, high-performing and versatile range

of electronic trip units.
Ekip: this is the name of the new, very latest generation
electronic trip units which equip the new frames of SACE
Tmax XT2 and SACE Tmax XT4 circuit-breakers.
6
The trip units are interchangeable and guarantee absolute All the Ekip trip units can be fitted with a vast range of
tripping reliability and precision. Apart from the continuous dedicated accessories. The main ones are:
green LED, which indicates correct operation of the protection – the Ekip Display, to be applied onto the front of the
trip unit, all the Ekip trip units also have a LED to signal electronic trip unit for simpler setting and for better reading
intervention of all the protection functions. of information;
To allow the Ekip units to communicate and exchange – the Ekip LED Meter, a device to be installed on the front of
information with the other devices, simply insert the Ekip Com the trip unit to simplify current readings;
module inside the circuit-breaker, leaving the space inside the – the Ekip TT, the new trip test unit;
electric panel free. – the Ekip T&P, the extraordinary testing and programming
unit.
Finally, for the first time ground fault protection G is also
available on the 160A frame.
Ekip: isn’t all this simply XTraordinary?
New SACE Tmax XT. XTended technology.
7
Construction Characteristics
Index
Construction characteristics ...................................................................................................1/2
Regulations and Reference Standards....................................................................................1/5
Identification of the SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers ..............................................................1/6
Nomenclature of the trip units and residual current protection devices .................................1/7
1/1
1SDC210033D0201
Construction characteristics
XT1
Size(G2.1) [A] 160
Poles [No.] 3, 4
Rated service voltage, Ue(G2.4) (AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690
(DC) [V] 500
Rated insulation voltage, Ui(G2.5) [V] 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp(G2.6) [kV] 8
Versions Fixed, Plug-in (2)
Breaking capacities according to IEC 60947-2 B C N S H
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu (G2.7)
Icu @ 220-230V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 25 40 65 85 100
Icu @ 380V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 18 25 36 50 70
Icu @ 415V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 18 25 36 50 70
Icu @ 440V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 15 25 36 50 65
Icu @ 500V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 8 18 30 36 50
Icu @ 525V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 6 8 22 35 35
Icu @ 690V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 3 4 6 8 10
Icu @ 250V (DC) 2 poles in series [kA] 18 25 36 50 70
Icu @ 500V (DC) 3 poles in series [kA] 18 25 36 50 70
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics (G2.8)
Ics @ 220-230V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 100% 75% (50) 75% 75%
Ics @ 380V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
Ics @ 415V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% (37.5)
Ics @ 440V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 75% 50% 50% 50% 50%
Ics @ 500V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 50% 50% 50% 50%
Ics @ 525V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 100% 50% 50% 50%
Ics @ 690V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 100% 100% 75% 50% 50%
Ics @ 250V (DC) 2 poles in series [kA] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75%
Ics @ 500V (DC) 3 poles in series [kA] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm (G2.10)
Icm @ 220-230V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 52.5 84 143 187 220
Icm @ 380V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 36 52.5 75.6 105 154
Icm @ 415V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 36 52.5 75.6 105 154
Icm @ 440V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 30 52.5 75.6 105 143
Icm @ 500V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 13.6 36 63 75,6 105
Icm @ 525V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 9 13.6 46.2 73.5 73.5
Icm @ 690V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 4.5 6 9 13.6 17
Breaking capacities according to NEMA-AB1
@ 240V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 25 40 65 85 100
@ 480V 50-60Hz (AC) [kA] 8 18 30 36 65
Utilisation Category (IEC 60947-2) A
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2
Isolation behaviour
Mounted on DIN rail DIN EN 50022
Mechanical life(G2.14) [No. Operations] 25000
[No. Hourly operations] 240
Electrical life @ 415 V (AC)(G2.13) [No. Operations] 8000
[No. Hourly operations] 120
Dimensions - Fixed 3 poles [mm] 76.2 x 70 x 130
(Width x Depth x Height) H
4 poles [mm] 101.6 x 70 x 130
D W
Total opening time

Circuit-breaker with shunt opening release [ms] 15
Circuit-breaker with undervoltage release [ms] 15
Trip units for power distribution
TMD/TMA
TMD Q
Ekip LS/I
Ekip I
Ekip LSI
Ekip LSIG
Trip units for motor protection
MF/MA
Ekip M-I
Ekip M-LIU
Ekip M-LRIU
Trip units for generator protection
TMG
Ekip G-LS/I
Trip units for oversized Neutral Protection
Ekip N-LS/I
Interchangeable protection trip units
(1)
90kA@690V only for XT4 160. Available shortly, please ask ABB SACE Q Complete circuit-breaker
(2)
XT1 plug-in In max=125A V Loose trip unit
1/2
1SDC210033D0201
XT2 XT3 XT4
160 250 160/250
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
690 690 690
500 500 500
1000 800 1000
8 8 8
Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in Fixed, Plug-in Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in
N S H L V N S N S H L V
65 85 100 150 200 50 85 65 85 100 150 200

36 50 70 120 200 36 50 36 50 70 120 150
36 50 70 120 150 36 50 36 50 70 120 150
36 50 65 100 150 25 40 36 50 65 100 150
30 36 50 60 70 20 30 30 36 50 60 70
20 25 30 36 50 13 20 20 25 45 50 50
10 12 15 18 20 5 8 10 12 15 20 25 (90 (1))
36 50 70 120 150 36 50 36 50 70 120 150
36 50 70 120 150 36 50 36 50 70 120 150
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% (27) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% (27) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% (20)
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
143 187 220 330 440 143 187 143 187 220 330 440
75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 330
75.6 105 154 264 330 75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 330
75.6 105 143 220 330 75.6 105 75.6 105 143 220 330
63 75.6 105 132 220 63 75.6 63 75.6 105 132 220
40 52.5 63 75.6 132 46.2 75.6 40 52.5 63 75.6 198
17 24 30 36 40 9 13.6 13.6 22.5 30 40 52.5
65 85 100 150 200 50 85 65 85 100 150 200

30 36 65 100 150 25 35 30 36 65 100 150
A A A
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2

DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022
25000 25000 25000
240 240 240
8000 8000 8000
120 120 120
90 x 82.5 x 130 105 x 70 x 150 105 x 82.5 x 160
120 x 82.5 x 130 140 x 70 x 150 140 x 82.5 x 160
15 15 15
15 15 15
Q Q
Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
V V
V V
Q Q
V V
V V

1/3
1SDC210033D0201
Construction characteristics
(Gx.x)
The references in round brackets in the technical catalogue refer to the Glossary in the final charter of the
technical catalogue.
All the moulded-case circuit-breakers in the SACE Tmax XT family are realized in accordance with
the following construction characteristics:
Q double insulation(G1.5);
Q positive operation(G1.6);
Q isolation behaviour(G1.7);
Q electromagnetic compatibility(G1.8);
Positive operation
Q tropicalization(G1.9);
Q impact and vibration resistance(G1.10);
Q power supply from the top towards the bottom or vice versa;
Q versatility of the installation. It is possible to mount the circuit-breaker in horizontal, vertical, or

lying down position without any derating of the rated characteristics;
Q no nominal performance derating for use up to an altitude of 2000m. Above 2000m, the proper-
ties of the atmosphere (composition of the air, dielectric strength, cooling power and pressure)
change, having an impact on the main parameters which define the circuit-breaker. The table
Installation positions below gives the changes to the main performance parameters;
Altitude 2000m 3000m 4000m 5000m

Rated employ voltage, Ue [V] 690 600 540 470
Rated uninterrupted current % 100 98 93 90
Q the SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers can be used in environments where the temperature is be-
tween -25°C and +70°C and stored in environments where the temperature is between -40°C
and +70°C. To use temperatures other than 40°C, see the “Temperature Performances” para-
graph of the Characteristic Curves and the technical information chapter;
Q different degrees of protection IP (International Protection)(G 1.11);
Circuit-breaker
1SDC210A20F0001
With Without With Front With With transmitted With high With low
front front (1) for lever rotary rotary handle and terminal terminal
-FLD- Handles accessory IP54 covers HTC covers LTC
A IP40 IP20 IP40 IP40 IP54 IP40 IP40
B IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP40 IP40
Protection degrees C NC NC NC NC NC IP40 IP30
(1)
During the installation of electrical accessories
NC Not classifiable
Accessories
Motor operator Residual Residual current Automatic Transfer
MOD, MOE current from switchboard Switch ATS021
or MOE-E devices RCQ020 and ATS022
On Front IP30 IP40 IP41 IP40
Q all the circuit-breakers in the XT family are fitted with a test pushbutton which allows the release
test to be done. This test must be carried out with the circuit-breaker closed.
Test pushbutton
1/4
1SDC210033D0201
Regulations and Reference Standards
Conformity with Standards

The SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers and their accessories are constructed in conformity with:
Q Standard(G6.1):
– IEC 60947-2;
Q Directives(G6.2):
– EC “Low Voltage Directive” (LVD) N° 2006/95/EC (in replacement of 73/23/EEC and subse-
quent amendments);
Hologram – EC “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive” (EMC) 2004/108/CE;
Q Naval Registers(G6.3) (ask ABB SACE for the versions available):
– Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd, Bureau Veritas, Rina, Det Norske Veritas,
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping, ABS.
Certification of conformity with the product Standards is carried out in the ABB SACE tests labora-
tory (accredited by SINAL) in respect of the EN 45011 European Standard, by the Italian certification
body ACAE (Association for Certification of Electrical Apparatus), member of the European LOVAG
organisation (Low Voltage Agreement Group) and by the Swedish certification body SEMKO be-
longing to the international IECEE organisation.
The SACE Tmax XT series has a hologram on the front, obtained using special anti-forgery tech-
niques, a guarantee of the quality and genuineness of the circuit-breaker as an ABB SACE product.
Company Quality System

The ABB SACE Quality System conforms with the following Standards:
Q ISO 9001 international Standard;
Q EN ISO 9001 (equivalent) European Standards;
Q UNI EN ISO 9001 (equivalent) Italian Standards.
The ABB SACE Quality System attained its first certification with the RINA certification body in 1990.
Environmental Management System, Social Responsibility and Ethics

Attention to protection of the environment is a priory commitment for ABB SACE. Confirmation of
Naval Registers this is the realisation of an Environmental Management System certified by RINA (ABB SACE was
the first industry in the electromechanical sector in Italy to obtain this recognition) in conformity
with the International ISO14001 Standard. In 1999 the Environmental Management System was
integrated with the Occupational Health and Safety Management System according to the OHSAS
18001 Standard and later, in 2005, with the SA 8000 (Social Accountability 8000) Standard, com-
mitting itself to respect of business ethics and working conditions.
The commitment to environmental protection becomes concrete through:

Q selection of materials, processes and packaging which optimise the true environmental impact
of the product;
Q use of recyclable materials;
Q voluntary respect of the RoHS directive(G6.4).
1/5
1SDC210033D0201
Identification of the SACE Tmax XT
circuit-breakers
The characteristics of the circuit-breaker are given on the rating nameplate on the front of the circuit-
breaker, and on the side rating plate.
Front label 1 7 4 3
7 10
6
5
15
11
1
9
16
12
14
8 13
2
Side label 1
7 9
7
3
6
5 4
15
16
6 14
12
10
1 Name of the circuit-breaker and performance level(*)

2 In: rated current of the circuit-breaker(*)
3 Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage(*)
4 Ui: insulation voltage(*)
5 Ics rated short-circuit duty breaking capacity(*)
6 Icu: rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity(*)
7 Ue: rated service voltage(*)
8 Symbol of isolation behaviour(*)
9 Reference Standard IEC 60947-2(*)
10 Serial number
11 Anti-forgery logo
12 Place of manufacture
13 Test pushbutton
14 CE marking
15 Utilisation Category
16 Reference Standard NEMA-AB1
(*)
In compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Standard
1/6
1SDC210033D0201
Nomenclature of the trip units and
residual current protection devices
The tables below give details of the logic with which each thermomagnetic trip units, electronic trip
units and residual current devices has been named.
Magnetic trip units

Family Name Protection
F: with fixed threshold
M: magnetic + A: with adjustable threshold
Thermomagnetic trip units

Family Name Protection
A: with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold
D: with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold
TM: thermomagnetic + G: with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold
(for generator protection)
Example:
Q MA: magnetic only trip unit, with adjustable protection threshold;
Q TMD: thermomagnetic trip unit, with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic protection threshold;
Q TMG: thermomagnetic trip unit, with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic protection threshold, specifically
for protection of generators.
Electronic trip units

Family Name Application Protection Circuit-breaker (1)
I
….: Distribution LS/I
M: Motor protection LSI XT2
Ekip + G: Generator protection + LSIG XT4
N: Neutral LIU
LRIU
(1)
Circuit-breaker has to be defined only with loose release.
Example:
Q Ekip LS/I: electronic trip unit for distribution networks protection, with “L” against overload and as an alterna-
tive “S” protection function against delay short circuit or “I” protection function against instantaneous short
circuit;
Q Ekip M-LRIU: electronic trip unit for motors protection, with LRIU protection functions;
Q Ekip N-LS/I XT2: loose electronic trip unit for the neutral protection, with “L” against overload and as an alter-
native “S” protection function against delay short circuit or “I” protection function against instantaneous short
circuit.
Residual Current Protection Devices

Family Name Typology
Inst: instantaneous type “A”
Sel: selective type “A”
RC + Sel 200: selective type “A” reduced to 200mm
B Type: selective type “B”
Example:
Q RC Inst: residual current protection device with instantaneous timing;
Q RC Sel 200: residual current protection device with adjustable time trip, reduced to 200mm;
Q RC B type: residual current protection device “B” type.
1/7
1SDC210033D0201
The SACE Tmax XT Ranges
Index
The SACE Tmax XT family ranges .......................................................................................2/2
Circuit-breakers for power distribution
Main characteristics ................................................................................................................2/3
Thermomagnetic trip units ......................................................................................................2/5
Electronic trip units..................................................................................................................2/7
Circuit-breakers for motors protection
Main characteristics ..............................................................................................................2/11
Magnetic trip units.................................................................................................................2/13
Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/14
Circuit-breakers for generator protection
Circuit-breakers for oversized neutral protection
Switch-disconnectors
Special applications
400Hz installations ................................................................................................................2/25
Communication system.........................................................................................................2/26
2/1
1SDC210033D0201
The SACE Tmax XT family ranges
The SACE Tmax XT moulded-case circuit-breaker family complies with different installation require-
ments. Circuit-breakers are available with trip units dedicated to different applications, such as
power distribution, generator protection, motor protection and oversized neutral protection. Some
of these circuit-breakers can also be used in communication systems and plants that function at
400Hz. Switch-disconnectors are also available.

In = Rated uninterrupted current(G2.2) XT1 160 XT2 160 XT3 250 XT4 250
Power distribution
TMD 16…160 63…250
TMD/TMA 1.6…160 16…250
Ekip LS/I 10…160 40…250
Ekip I 10…160 40…250
Ekip LSI 10…160 40…250
Ekip LSIG 10…160 40…250
Motor protection
Magnetic trip units
MF/MA 1…100(1) 100…200 (1) 10…200 (1)
Ekip M-I 20…100(1)
Ekip M-LIU 25…100 (1) 40…160 (1)
(1)
Ekip M-LRIU 25…100 40…160 (1)
Generator Protection
TMG 16…160 63…250
Ekip G-LSI 10…160 40…250
Oversized Neutral Protection 160%
Ekip N-LS/I 10…100(2) 40…160 (2)
Switch-disconnectors Q Q Q
400 Hz Q Q Q Q
Communication Q Q
(1)
Only 3 poles version
(2)
Only 4 poles version
2/2
1SDC210033D0201
Main characteristics
SACE Tmax XT moulded-case circuit-breakers are the ideal solution for all distribution levels, from
the main low voltage switchboard to the subswitchboards in the installation. They feature high
specific let-through current peak and energy limiting characteristics that allow the circuits and
equipment on the load side to be sized in an optimum way. SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers with
thermomagnetic and electronic trip units protect against overloads, short-circuits, earth faults and
indirect contacts in low voltage distribution networks.
The SACE Tmax XT family of moulded-case circuit-breakers can be equipped with:

Q thermomagnetic trip units(G3.2), for direct and alternating current network protection, using the
physical properties of a bimetal and an electromagnet to detect the overloads and short-circuits;
Q electronic trip units(G3.4), for alternating current network protection. Releases with microproc-
essor technology obtain protection functions that make the operations extremely reliable and
accurate. The power required for operating them correctly is supplied straight from the current
sensors of the releases. This ensures that they trip even in single-phase conditions and on a level
with the minimum setting.
The electronic protection trip unit consists of:
– 3 or 4 current sensors (current transformers);
– a protection unit;
– an opening solenoid (built into the electronic trip unit).
Characteristics of Electronic trip units SACE Tmax XT

Operating temperature -25°C…+70°C
Relative humidity 98%
Self-supplied 0.2xIn (single phase)(1) (2)
Auxiliary supply (where applicable) 24V DC ± 20%
Operating frequency 45…60Hz or 400…440Hz
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC 60947-2 Annex F
(1)
0.32 x In for Ekip N-LS/I
(1)
For 10A and 25A ask ABB
2/3
1SDC210033D0201
Characteristics of circuit-breakers for power distribution

XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4
Size(G2.1) [A] 160 160 250 160/250
Poles [Nr.] 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
(AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690 690 690
Rated service voltage, Ue(G2.4)
(DC) [V] 500 500 500 500
Rated insulation voltage, Ui(G2.5) [V] 800 1000 800 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp(G2.6) [kV] 8 8 8 8
Fixed, Fixed, Withdrawable, Fixed, Fixed, Withdrawable,
Versions
Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in
Breaking capacities B C N S H N S H L V N S N S H L V
Thermomagnetic, Thermomag- Thermomagnetic,
Trip units Thermomagnetic
Electronic netic Electronic
TMD/TMA Q Q
TMD Q Q
Ekip LS/I Q Q
Ekip I Q Q
Ekip LSI Q Q
Ekip LSIG Q Q
Interchangeability Q Q
Q Complete circuit-breaker
V Loose trip unit
2/4
1SDC210033D0201
TMD
Main characteristics:
Q available for XT1 and XT3 in the three-pole and four-pole versions;
Q protections:
– against overload (L): adjustable protection threshold from 0.7...1xIn, with inverse long-time
trip curve;
– against instantaneous short-circuits (I): fixed 10xIn protection threshold, with instantaneous
trip curve;
Q 100% neutral protection in four-pole circuit-breakers. 50% neutral protection is only available for
In≥125A;
Q the thermal protection setting is made by turning the relative cursor on the front of the release.
Example with XT3 250A
Rotary switch for thermal

protection setting
XT1
TMD
Breaking capacity B B B,C B,C,N B,C,N ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
In [A] 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
I 1 = 0.7…1xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – 80 100
I3 [A] 450 450 450 450 450 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Neutral [A] - 100% 450 450 450 450 450 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
I 3 = 10xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – 800 1000
XT3
TMD
In [A] 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
I 1 = 0.7…1xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – 80 100 125 160
I3 [A] 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
Neutral [A] - 100% 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
I 3 = 10xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – 800 1000 1250 1600
2/5
1SDC210033D0201
TMD/TMA
Q protections:
– against overload (L): adjustable protection threshold from 0.7...1xIn, with inverse long time
trip curve;
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I):
- fixed protection threshold for In≤32A,
- adjustable threshold beteewn 8…10xIn for 40A,
- adjustable threshold beteewn 6…10xIn for 50A,
- adjustable threshold beteewn 5…10xIn for In≥63A;
Q 100% neutral protection in four-pole circuit-breakers. 50% neutral protection is only available for
In≥125A;
Q the thermal and magnetic protection settings are made by turning the relative cursors on the
front of the release.
Rotary switch for magnetic Rotary switch for thermal

protection setting protection setting
XT2
TMD/TMA
In [A] 1.6(1) 2(1) 2.5(1) 3.2(1) 4(1) 5(1) 6.3(1) 8(1) 10(1) 12.5(1) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Neutral [A] - 100% 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
I1 = 0.7…1xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 80 100
TMD 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 300 300 300 320
TMA 300… 300… 300… 400… 500… 625… 800…
400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 300 300 300 320 300… 300… 300… 400… 500… 625… 800…
400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 400… 1000…
800 2000
(1)
Available only as complete circuit-breaker
XT4
TMD/TMA
In [A] 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 225 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 225 250
I1 = 0.7…1xIn Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – 80 100 125 125 160
TMD 300 300 300 320
TMA 300… 300… 315… 400… 500… 625… 800… 1000… 1125… 1250…
400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2250 2500
Neutral [A] - 100% 300 300 300 320 300… 300… 315… 400… 500… 625… 800… 1000… 1125… 1250…
400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2250 2500
Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – 315… 500… 625… 625… 500…
630 1000 1250 1250 1000
2/6
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip I
Q usable with the XT2 and XT4 circuit-breaker in the three-pole and four-pole versions;
Q protections:
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I): adjustable protection threshold from 1...10xIn, with
instantaneous trip curve;
– of the neutral in four-pole circuit-breakers:
- for In≥100A in the OFF or ON positions, 50% and 100% of the phases can be selected;
- for In<100A, neutral protection is fixed at 100% of the phases and disableded by user;
Q manual setting using the relative dip-switches, which allow the settings to be made even when
the trip unit is off;
Q LED:
– LED lit with a steady green light indicating that the trip unit is supplied correctly. The LED
comes on when the current exceeds 0.2xIn;
– LED with a steady red light, indicating that protection I has tripped; Red LED light on connect-
ing Ekip TT or Ekip T&P accessories after circuit-breaker opening for “I protection” interven-
tion;
– Ekip I is equipped with a trip coil disconnection protection device that detects whether the
opening solenoid has disconnected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing simultane-
ously;
Q test connector on the front of the trip unit;
– to connect the Ekip TT trip test unit, which allows trip test, LED test and signalling about lat-
est trip happened;
– to connect the Ekip T&P unit, which allows the measurements to be read, the trip test to be
conducted and the I protection function test to be carried out;
Q self-supply from a minimum current of 0.2xIn up.
I protection LED Power-on LED
Dip switch for I protection Test Connector

function setting
Slot for lead seal
Ekip I
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve (1) Excludability Relation
Manual setting:
I 3= 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4.5,
Against short-circuits with 5.5, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9,
adjustable treshold and 10xIn ≤40 ms Yes t=k
instantaneous trip time
Tolerance: ±20% I>4In
±10% I≤4In
(1)
Tollerances in case of:
– self-powered trip unit at full power;
– 2 or 3 phase power supply.
In conditions other than those considered, the trip time is ≤60 ms.
2/7
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip LS/I
Main characteristics: :
Q protections:
– against overload (L): 0.4...1xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable time trip curve;
– against short-circuit with delay (S): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable
time trip curve (as an alternative to I protection);
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with instan-
taneous trip curve (as an alternative to S protection);
- for In ≥100A can be selected in the OFF or ON positions, 50%, 100% of the phases;
- for In <100A, neutral protection is fixed at 100% of the phases and disableded by user;
Q manual setting using the relative dip-switches on the front of the trip unit, which allow the set-
tings to be made even when the trip unit is off;
Q LED:
– LED with steady green light indicating that the trip unit is supplied correctly. The LED comes
on when the current exceeds 0.2xIn;
– red LED for each protection:
- L: LED with steady red light, indicates pre-alarm for current exceeding 0.9xI1;
- L: LED with flashing red light, indicates alarm for current exceeding setted threshold;
- LS/I: LED with steady red light, shows that the protection has tripped. After the circuit-
breaker has opened, connect the Ekip TT or Ekip T&P accessory to find out which protec-
tion function tripped the trip unit;
– Ekip LS/I is equipped with a trip coil disconnection detection device that detects whether the
opening solenoid has disconnected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing simultaneously;
Q test connector on the front of the release:
– to connect the Ekip TT trip test unit, which allows trip test, LED test and signalling about lat-
est trip happened;
conducted and the protection functions test to be carried out;
Q thermal memory which can be activated by Ekip T&P;
Q self-supply from 0.2xIn minimum current up.
Dip switch for the trip curve selection
Power-on LED
L, S, I protection LED Test Connector
Slot for lead seal

Dip switch for the selection
between S protection function
or I protection function Dip switch for LS/I
protection function setting
Ekip LS/I
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve(1) Excludability Relation Thermal memory
Against overloads with Manual setting: Manual setting:
long inverse time delay trip I1= 0.4...1xIn step 0.04 t1= 12-36s at I=3xI1
– t = k/l2 Yes
according to IEC 60947-2 Tolerance: trip between Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
Standard 1.05…1.3 I1 (IEC 60947-2) ±20% from 4xIn
Manual setting: t2= 0.1-0.2s
Against short-circuits with I2= 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
indipendend time delay 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Yes t=k –
(t=k) ±20% from 4xIn
Tolerance: ±10%
Manual setting:
Against short-circuits with I3= 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-
adjustable treshold and 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Instantaneous Yes t=k –
instantaneous trip time
Tolerance: ±10%
(1)
Tollerances in case of: Protection Trip threshold Trip time
L release between 1.05 and 1.25 x I1 ±20%
In conditions other than those considered, the S ±10% ±20%
following tollerance hold: I ±15% ≤60 ms
2/8
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip LSI and Ekip LSIG
Q available for XT2 and XT4 in three-pole and four-pole versions;
Q protections:
– against overloads (L): 0.4...1xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable time trip
curve;
– against short-circuits with delay (S): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable
time trip curve (short inverse time (t=k2) or indipendent time (t=k));
– against instantaneous short-circuits (I): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with instan-
taneous trip curve;
– against earth faults (G): 0.2...1xIn adjustable protection threshold, with indipendent time trip
curve;
- for In≥100A can be selected in OFF or ON, 50%, 100% of phases;
- for In<100A neutral protection is fixed on 100% of phases and disableded by user;
Q setting:
– manual setting using the relative dip-switches on the front of the trip unit, which allow the
settings to be made even when the trip unit is off;
– electronic setting, made both locally using the Ekip T&P or Ekip Display accessory and via
remote control, by means of the Ekip Com unit;
Q LED:
– LED on with steady green light indicating that the trip unit is supplied correctly. The LED
- LSIG: LED with steady red light, shows that the protection has tripped. After the circuit-
– the trip unit is equipped with a device that detects the eventual opening solenoid disconnec-
tion thanks to the simultaneous blinking of all the LED;
– to connect the Ekip TT trip test unit, which allows trip test, LED test and signalling about the
latest trip happened;
conducted, the protection functions test to be carried out, electronic setting of the protection
functions of the trip unit and of the communication parameters;
Q thermal memory which can be activated by Ekip T&P or Ekip Display;
Q self-supply from a minimum current of 0.2xIn up;
Q the three-pole version can be accessorized with external neutral;
Q with the addition of the Ekip Com in the circuit-breaker, you can:
– acquire and transmit a wide range of information via remote control;
– accomplish the circuit-breaker opening and closing commands by means of the motor op-
erator in the electronic version (MOE-E);
– know the state of the circuit-breaker (open/closed/trip) via remote control;
– setting the configuration and programming the unit, such as the current thresholds and the
protection function curves.
2/9
1SDC210033D0201
L, S, I, G protection LED Power-on LED
Slot for lead seal
Test connector
Dip switch for the S trip
curves selection
Selection for manual or
electronic setting
Selection for remote

Dip switch for LSIG
or local setting
protection function setting
Ekip LSI – Ekip LSIG

Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve(1) Excludability Relation Thermal
memory
Manual setting: Manual setting:
I1= 0.4...1xIn step 0.02 t1 = 3-12-36-72s
Tolerance: trip between a I=3xI1 – t = k/l2 –
Against overloads with 1.05…1.3 I1 (IEC 60947-2) Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
long inverse time delay trip ±20% from 4xIn
according to IEC 60947-2 Electronic setting: Electronic setting:
Standard I1= 0.2...1xIn step 0.01 t1 = 3...72s
Tolerance: trip between at I=3xI1 step 0.2 – t = k/l2 Yes
1.05…1.3 I1 (IEC 60947-2) Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
±20% from 4xIn
I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- t2= 0.05-0.10-0.20-0.40s
6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn at 10xIn Yes t = k/l2 –
Tolerance: ±10% Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
±20% from 4xIn
Electronic setting: Electronic setting:
I2 = 1...10xIn step 0.1 t2 = 0.05...0.40s
Tolerance: ±10% at 10xIn step 0.01 Yes t = k/l2 –
Against short-circuits
with inverse short (t=k/I2) Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
or indipendent (t=k) time ±20% from 4xIn
delay trip Manual setting: Manual setting:
I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- t2 = 0.05-0.1-0.2-0.4s
6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Yes t=k –
Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
Tolerance: ±10% ±20% from 4xIn
I2 = 1...10xIn step 0.1 t2 = 0.05...0.4s step 0.01
Yes t=k –
Tolerance: ±10% Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
±20% from 4xIn
Manual setting:
I3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-
6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Instantaneous Yes t=k –
Against short-circuits with
adjustable threshold and Tolerance: ±20%
instantaneous trip time Electronic setting:
I3 = 1...10xIn step 0.1 Instantaneous Yes t=k –
Tolerance: ±10%
I4 = 0.2-0.25-0.45-0.55-0.75- t4 = 0.1-0.2-0.4-0.8s
Yes I 2t = k –
Against earth fault with 0.8-1xIn Tolerance: ±15%
independent time delay Tolerance: ±10%
trip(2) Electronic setting: Electronic setting:
I4 = 0.2...1xIn step 0.1 t4 = 0.1...0.8s step 0.01s Yes I 2t = k –
Tolerance: ±10% Tolerance: ±15%
(1) (2)
Tollerances in case of: Protection G is inhibited for currents higher than 4
– self-powered trip unit at full power; Protection Trip threshold Trip time In when In≥40A and for currents higher than 2 In for
– 2 or 3 phase power supply. L release between 1.05 and 1.3 x I1 ±20% In<40A.
In conditions other than those considered, S ±10% ±20%
the following tollerance hold: I ±15% ≤60 ms
G ±15% ±20%
2/10
1SDC210033D0201
The safety and reliability of the solution are important aspects that must be considered when choos-
ing and manufacturing the system for starting(G4.3 and G4.4) and monitoring motors.
Start-up is a particularly critical phase for the motor itself and for the installation powering it. Even
rated service needs to be adequately monitored and protected so as to deal with any faults that
might occur.
When it comes to direct starting, ABB SACE proposes two different solutions:
Q a conventional system with three poles a circuit-breaker equipped with a magnetic only trip
unit for protection against short-circuits, a thermal relay for protection against overloads and
phase failure or imbalance, and a contactor to operate the motor;
Q an advanced protection system which integrates all the protection and monitoring functions,
and a contactor for operating the motor, in the circuit-breaker itself.
Several different factors must be considered when choosing and coordinating the protection and
operating devices, e.g.:
Q the electrical specifications of the motor (type, power rating, efficiency, cosϕ);
Q the starting type and diagram;
Q the fault current and voltage in the part of the network where the motor is installed.
Circuit-breaker with
electronic trip unit
Circuit-breaker
Ekip M-LRIU
with magnetic
only trip unit
PR212/CI
Contactor
Contactor
Thermal relay
Motor
Motor
PTC
Conventional system Advanced protection system
Consult the QT7 Technical Application Paper: “The asynchronous three-phase motor: general infor-
mation and ABB’s offer for coordinating the protections” for further details.
The motor protection and operating devices must be chosen in accordance with the coordination
tables provided by ABB either through documentation “Coordination tables” or on the web site:
http://www.abbcontrol.fr/coordination_tables/.
2/11
1SDC210033D0201
Characteristics of circuit-breakers for protecting motors

XT2 XT3 XT4
Size(G2.1) [A] 160 250 160/250
Poles [Nr.] 3 3 3
(AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690 690
Rated service voltage, Ue (G2.4)
(DC) [V] 500 500 500
Rated insulation voltage, Ui(G2.5) [V] 1000 800 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp(G2.6) [kV] 8 8 8
Versions Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in Fixed, Plug-in Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in
Breaking capacities N S H L V N S N S H L V
Trip Units Magnetic, Electronic Magnetic Magnetic, Electronic
MF/MA Q Q Q
Ekip M-I Q
Ekip M-LIU V V
Ekip M-LRIU V V
V Loose trip unit
2/12
1SDC210033D0201
Magnetic trip units
MF/MA
Q available for XT2, XT3 and XT4 in the three-pole version only, these trip units are mainly used for
protecting motors, in conjunction with a thermal relay and a contactor;
Q protections:
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I) for XT2: for In≤12.5A the protection threshold I is fixed
at 14xIn, whereas for In>12.5A the protection threshold I is adjustable from 6..14xIn;
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I) for XT3: the protection threshold I is adjustable from
6..12xIn;
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I) for XT4: the protection threshold I is adjustable from
5..10xIn;
Q the magnetic protection setting is made by turning the relative cursor on the front of the release.
Rotary switch for magnetic

protection setting
XT2
MF/MA
In [A] 1(1) 2(1) 4(1) 8.5(1) 12.5(1) 20 32 52 80 100
I3 = MF 14 28 56 120 175
I3 = 14xIn [A]
I3 = 6..14xIn [A] I3 = MA 120...280 192…448 314…728 480…1120 600...1400
(1)
XT3
MA
In [A] 100 125 160 200
I3 [A] 600…1200 750…1500 960…1920 1200…2400
I3 = 6..12xIn
XT4
MA
In [A] 10(1) 12.5(1) 20 32 52 80 100 125 160 200
I3 [A] 50…100 62.5…125 100…200 160…320 260…520 400…800 500…1000 625…1250 800…1600 1000…2000
I3 = 5..10xIn
(1)
2/13
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip M-I
Q only available for XT2 in three-pole version. It is normally used in combination with a thermal relay
and a contactor for motor protection;
Q protections:
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I): protection threshold adjustable from 6...14xIn, with
instantaneous trip curve;
Q manual setting by means of the special dip-switches positioned on the front of the trip unit,
which allow its adjustment even with the trip unit off;
Q LED:
– fixed green LED which indicates correct operation of the trip unit; the LED lights up for a cur-
rent over 0.2xIn;
Q Test connector positioned on the front of the trip unit:
– for connection of the Ekip TT test unit, which allows the trip test and the LED test;
– for connection of the Ekip T&P unit, which allows the measurements to be read, to carry out
the trip test and to carry out the protection function test;
– self-supply starting from a minimum current of 0.2 x In.
LED power-on
Slot for lead seal
Dip Switch for setting Test Connector

protection function I
Ekip M-I
Thermal
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve(1) Excludability Relation
memory
Manual setting:
Against short-circuits with I 3 = 6-6,5-7-7,5-8-8,5-9-9,5-10-
adjustable threshold and 10,5-11-11,5-12,5-13-13,5- Instantaneous – t=k –
instantaneous trip time 14xIn
Tolerance: ±10%
(1)
In conditions other than those considered, the
following tollerance hold:
Protection Trip threshold Trip time

I ±15% ≤60 ms
2/14
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip M-LIU
Q available for XT2 and XT4 in the three-pole version, this device protects motors. The L protection
function protects the motor against overloads, in accordance with the indications and classes
defined by standard IEC 60947-4-1;
Q protections:
– against overloads (L): 0.4...1xIn adjustable threshold. The operating time is established by
choosing the operating class defined by Standard IEC 60947-4-1: Class 3E, 5E, 10E, 20E;
– against short-circuits (I): 6...13xIn adjustable threshold with instantaneous operating time;
– against phase imbalance (U): the protection can be selected either in the ON or OFF position.
When the selector is in the ON position, the threshold is 50% I1, with fixed operating time;
Q manual setting using the relative dip-switches on the front of the release;
Q LED:
- LIU: LED with steady red light, shows that the protection has tripped. After the circuit-
– release Ekip M-LIU is equipped with a trip coil disconnection detection device that detects
whether the opening solenoid has disconnected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing
simultaneously;
conducted and the protection function test to be carried out;
Q thermal memory always active;
Q self-supply starting from a minimum current of 0.2xIn.
L, I, U protection LED Power-on LED
Slot for lead seal
Dip switch for L protection Test connector

function setting
Dip switch for I protection
function setting
Dip switch for the trip classes setting

according to IEC 60947-4-1 U protection function ON-OFF
Ekip M-LIU
Thermal
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve(1) Excludability Relation
memory
Against overloads with long I 1= 0.4...1xIn step 0.04 Operating class: 3E, 5E,
inverse time delay according Tolerance: 10E, 20E – t = k/l 2 Yes
to IEC 60947-4-1 Standard trip between 1.05…1.3xI Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
1
(IEC 60947-4-1) ±20% from 4xIn
Against short-circuits with Manual setting:
adjustable threshold and I 3 = 6...13xIn step 1 Instantaneous – t=k –
instantaneous trip time Tolerance: ±10%
Aganist phase current I 6 = ON / OFF When ON, t 6= 2s
unbalanced or loss of phase When ON, I 6=50% I1 Yes t=k –
with indipendend time delay Tolerance: ±10%
Tolerance: ±15% (IEC 60947-4-1)
(1)
In conditions other than those considered, I ±15% ≤60 ms
the following tollerance hold: U ±20% ±20%
2/15
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip M-LRIU
Q available for XT2 and XT4 in the three-pole version, this device is generally used for protecting
integrated motors;
Q protections:
– against overloads (L): 0.4...1xIn adjustable threshold. The operating time is established by
choosing the operating class defined by standard IEC 60947-4-1;
– rotor locking (R): with adjustable threshold in the OFF position or from 3...9xI1, with settable
operating time;
– against instantaneous short-circuits (I): with adjustable threshold from 6...13xIn and instanta-
neous operating time;
– against phase imbalance (U): with adjustable threshold in the ON or OFF positions;
Q setting:
– manual setting using the relative dip-switches on the front of the trip unit, which allow the
settings to be made even when the trip unit is off;
– electronic setting, made both locally using Ekip T&P or Ekip Display accessory and via remote
control, by means of the dialogue unit Ekip Com. Use of electronic setting allows other func-
tions to be activated:
- function for protection against earth faults (G): 0.2..1xIn adjustable protection threshold,
with a time constant trip curve;
- duty mode setting (Normal/Heavy):
- the Normal duty mode requires use of a circuit-breaker and a contactor. In the case of
tripping, the Ekip M-LRIU release commands the opening of the contactor via PR212/CI;
- the Heavy duty mode foresees circuit-breaker opening for all overcurrent conditions, and
just the function of motor operation is entrusted to the contactor;
- BACK UP function:
- this protection is designed to handle the situation whereby, in the Normal duty mode, the
opening command transmitted to the contactor via PR212/CI has not been implement-
ed, i.e. the contactor has not tripped. If this happens, the Ekip M-LRIU release transmits
a trip command directly to the circuit-breaker after having waited a time defined. A wait-
ing time between the command transmitted to the contactor and the back-up command
transmitted to the circuit-breaker is required so as to take the contactor opening time
into account;
- PTC protection setting:
- PTC: this protection, monitors the temperature inside the protected motor by means
of a PTC sensor. If the temperature is too high, the Ekip M-LRIU release will command
contactor opening (if the mode is “Normal”) or circuit-breaker opening (if the mode is
“Heavy”). To realize this protection is necessary to order the connector available for PTC;
Q LED:
- fixed LED MAN/ELT show the kind of active parameters;
- LRIU: LED with steady red light, shows that the protection has tripped. After the circuit-
– Ekip M-LRIU is equipped with a trip coil disconnection detection device that detects whether
the opening solenoid has disconnected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing simulta-
neously;
conducted, the protection function test to be carried out, and electronic setting of the protec-
tion function of the release and of the communication parameters;
Q thermal memory always active;
Q self-supply from a minimum current of 0.2xIn up;
2/16
1SDC210033D0201
Q with the addition of the Ekip Com in the circuit-breaker, you can:
– acquire and transmit a wide range of information via remote control;
– accomplish the circuit-breaker opening and closing commands by means of the motor op-
erator in the electronic version (MOE-E);
– know the state of the circuit-breaker (open/closed/trip) via remote control;
– setting the configuration and programming parameters of the unit, such as the current thresh-
olds and the protection function curves.
LED for Electronic/Manual setting
L, R, I, U protection LED Setting MAN/ELT
Power-on LED
Dip switch for the trip Slot for lead seal
classes setting according
to IEC 60947-4-1 Test connector
Dip switch for L protection Dip switch for I protection

function setting function setting
R protection function ON-OFF U protection function ON-OFF
Dip switch for R protection function setting Dip switch for the trip curve selection
Ekip M-LRIU
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve (1) Excludability Relation Thermal
memory
I1 = 0.4...1xIn step 0.04 Trip class: 3E, 5E, 10E, 20E
– t = k/l2 Yes
Tolerance: in accordance Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
Against overloads with long with IEC 60947-4-1 ±20% from 4xIn
inverse time delay trip according
to IEC 60947-4-1 Electronic setting: Electronic setting:
I1 = 0.4...1xIn step 0.01 Trip class: 1...10s step 0.5s
– t = k/l2 Yes
Tolerance: in accordance Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
with IEC 60947-4-1 ±20% from 4xIn
Manual setting: Manual setting: t5 = 1, 4s
I5 = OFF, 3, 6, 9xI1 Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn Yes t=k –
Against rotor block with delayed Tolerance: ±10% (IEC 60947-4-1) ±20% from 4xIn
trip and with an indipendent time
R delay trip Electronic setting: Electronic setting:
I5 = OFF, 3...9xI1 step 0.1I1 t5 =1...4s step 0.5
Yes t=k –
Tolerance: ±10% (IEC 60947-4-1) Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
±20% from 4xIn
Manual setting:
I3 = 6-8-11-13xIn Instantaneous – t=k –
Against short-circuits threshold Tolerance: ±10%
with adjustable threshold and
istantaneous trip time Electronic setting:
I3 = 1...13xIn Instantaneous – t=k –
Tolerance: ±10%
I6 = On / Off t6 = 2s
When ON, I6 = 50% I1 Yes t=k –
Tolerance: ±20%
Aganist phase current Tolerance: ±15%
unbalanced or loss of phase Electrical setting: Electronic setting:
with tripping at indipendent time I6 = On / Off t6 = 0...5s step 0.5
When ON, I6 = 10%..50% I1 step Tolerance: ±20% Yes t=k –
10% I1
Tolerance: ±15%
Against earth fault with I4 = 0.2...1xIn step 0.1In t4 = 0.1...0.8s step 0.01 Yes t=k –
indipendent time delay trip(2)
Tolerance: ±10% Tolerance: ±15%
(1) (2)
Tollerances in case of: Protection Trip threshold Trip time Protection G is inhibited for currents higher than 4
– self-powered trip unit at full power; In when In≥40A and for currents higher than 2 In
– 2 or 3 phase power supply. for In<40A.
In conditions other than those considered, R ±20% ±20%
the following tollerance hold: I ±20% ≤50 ms
U ±20% ±20%
G ±15% ±20%
2/17
1SDC210033D0201
SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers can be equipped with thermomagnetic trip units with a low mag-
netic threshold.
This type of release can been designed and made so as to provide a solution for protecting small
generators and distribution networks with very long cables (slight end of line fault current owing to
the high cable impedance).
Generator protection requires a low magnetic threshold, typically about three times circuit-breaker’s
rated current, so as to “cut” the short-circuit current in the “transient” zone of the decrement curve
of the generator fault current. Consult the “Electrical installation handbook” ABB SACE guide vol. 2
for further details.
t [s]
10
synchronous
phase
transient
phase
10-1
10-2
sub transient
phase
1SDC21092EF0001
10-3
1 10 10 2
x I1
Characteristics of circuit-breakers for protecting generators

XT2 XT3 XT4
Size(G2.1) [A] 160 250 160/250
Poles [Nr.] 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
(AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690 690
Rated service voltage, Ue (G2.4)
(DC) [V] 500 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp (G2.6) [kV] 8 8 8
Versions Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in Fixed, Plug-in Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in
Breaking capacities N S N S N S
Trip units Thermomagnetic, Electronic Thermomagnetic Electronic
TMG Q Q
Ekip G-LS/I V V
V Loose trip unit
2/18
1SDC210033D0201
TMG
Q protections:
– against overloads (L): adjustable 0.7...1xIn protection threshold, with inverse long-time trip
curve;
– against instantaneous short-circuits (I): fixed 3xIn protection threshold, with instantaneous
trip curve;
– 100% neutral protection in four-pole circuit-breakers;
Q the thermal protection setting is made by turning the relative cursor on the front of the release.
Rotary switch for thermal

protection setting
XT2
TMG
In [A] 16 (1) 20(1) 25(1) 32 (1) 40(1) 50 (1) 63(1) 80 100 125 160
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
I 1 = 0.7…1xIn
I 3 [A] 160 160 160 160 200 200 200 240 300 375 480
Neutral [A] - 100% – – – – – – – – – 450 450
I 3 = 3xIn
(1)
XT3
TMG
In [A] 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
I 1 = 0.7…1xIn
I 3 [A] 400 400 400 400 480 600 750
Neutral [A] - 100% 400 400 400 400 480 600 750
I 3 = 3xIn
2/19
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip G-LS/I
Q available for XT2 and XT4 in the three-pole and four-pole versions. Allows the protection against
overloads to be extensively adjusted;
Q protections:
– against overloads (L): I1=0.4...1xIn adjustable protection threshold, with inverse long-time trip
curve;
– against delayed short-circuits (S): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable
trip curve (as an alternative to I protection);
– against instantaneous short-circuits (I): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with instan-
taneous operating time (as an alternative to S protection);
– neutral, in four-pole circuit-breakers, can be set in the OFF, ON positions at 50% or 100% of
the phases;
Q LED:
- L: LED with steady red light, indicates pre-alarm for current exceeding setted threshold;
– Ekip G-LS/I is equipped with a trip coil disconnection detection device that detects whether
the opening solenoid has disconnected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing simulta-
neously;
– for connecting the Ekip T&P unit which allows the measurements to be read and the trip test
to be carried out;
Q self-supply from 0.2xIn up.
2/20
1SDC210033D0201
Dip switch for the selection between S protection
L, S, I protection LED function or I protection function
Power-on LED
Test connector
Slot for lead seal
Dip switch for LS/I protection function setting
Ekip G-LS/I
Protection function Trip threshold Trip curve(1) Excludability Relation Thermal
memory
Against overloads with I 1 = 0.4...1xIn step 0.04 t 1 = 3-6s at I = 3xI1
inverse long-time delayed
Tolerance: Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn – t = k/l 2 Yes
tripping according to
IEC 60947-2 standard trip between 1.05…1.3xI 1 ±15% from 4xIn
(IEC 60947-2)
Manual setting: t 2 = 0.05-0.075-0.1-0.2s
I 2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
Against short-circuit with 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn ±15% from 4xIn Yes t=k –
indipendent time delay trip
Tolerance: ±10% up to 2xIn
±20% from 2xIn
Manual setting:
Against short-circuits with I 3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-
adjustable threshold and 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Instantaneous Yes t=k –
istantaneous trip time
Tolerance: ±10%
(1)
In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerance hold:
Protection Trip threshold Trip time

S ±10% ±20%
I ±15% ≤60 ms
2/21
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers for oversized neutral protection
The SACE Tmax XT range of circuit-breakers with oversized neutral is used in certain applications
where harmonics or unbalance loads or single phase create an overload on the neutral conductor.
Under these conditions, a current of a considerable value could travel along the neutral conductor.
In particular, third-order harmonics and relative multiples add together on the neutral and give rise to
a current value that could be higher than the one which travels along the phase conductors.
For this reason, circuit-breakers with oversized neutral provide adequate protection in installations
where the neutral conductor is sized with a larger section than the phase conductors.
The main types of equipment that generate harmonics are given below by way of example:
Q personal computers;
Q fluorescent lamps;
Q static converters;
Q no-break power units;
Q variable speed drives;
Q welding machines.
By and large, the wave shape is distorted owing to the presence of semiconductor devices able to
conduct for a fraction of the entire cycle, creating discontinuous trends and consequently introduc-
ing numerous harmonics.
Consult the “Electrical installation handbook” ABB SACE guide vol. 2 for further details.
Characteristics of circuit-breakers for oversized neutral protection

XT2 XT4
Size(G2.1) [A] 160 160/250
Uninterrupted nominal current, In [A] 10, 63, 100 40, 63, 100, 160
Poles [Nr.] 4 4
Rated service voltage, Ue(G2.4) (AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690
Rated insulation voltage, Ui(G2.5) [V] 1000 1000
(G2.6)
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8
Versions Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in Fixed, Withdrawable, Plug-in
Breaking capacity N S H L V N S H L V
Trip units Electronic Electronic
Ekip N-LS/I V V
V Loose trip unit
2/22
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip N-LS/I
Q available for XT2 and XT4 in the four-pole version;
Q protections:
– against overload (L): I1=0.4...1xIn adjustable protection threshold, with inverse long-time trip
curve;
– against delayed short-circuits (S): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with adjustable
trip curve (as an alternative to I protection);
– against instantaneous short-circuit (I): 1...10xIn adjustable protection threshold, with instan-
taneous operating time (as an alternative to S protection);
– neutral can be set in the OFF or ON positions, at 100% or at 160% of the phases;
Q LED:
– Ekip N-LS/I is equipped with a device that detects whether the opening solenoid has discon-
nected. Signalling is made by all the LEDs flashing simultaneously;
– to connect the Ekip TT trip test unit which allows trip test, LED test and signalling about the
– for connecting the Ekip T&P unit, which allows the measurements to be read and the trip test
to be carried out;
Q self-supply from 0.32xIn.
Dip switch for the selection between S

L, S, I protection LED protection function or I protection function
Power-on LED
Dip switch for Test connector
neutral selection
Slot for lead seal
Dip switch for LS/I protection function setting

Ekip N-LS/I
Protection function Trip threshold Time-current curve (1) Excludability Relation Thermal
memory
Against overloads with inverse Manual setting: Manual setting:
long-time delayed tripping. I1 = 0.4...1xIn step 0.04 t1 = 12-36s at I= 3xI1
– t = k/l2 Yes
According to IEC 60947-2 Tolerance: trip between Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
Standard 1.05…1.3xI1 (IEC 60947-2) ±15% from 4xIn
Manual setting: t2 = 0.1-0.2s
Against short-circuits with I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- Tolerance: ±10% up to 4xIn
inverse short indipendent time 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Yes t=k –
delay trip (t=k) ±20% from 4xIn
Tolerance: ±10%
Manual setting:
Against short-circuits with I3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-
6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10xIn Instantaneous Yes t=k –
istantaneous trip time
Tolerance: ±10%
(1)
In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerance hold: S ±10% ±20%
I ±15% ≤60 ms
2/23
1SDC210033D0201
Switch-disconnectors
The switch-disconnector (or, in short, disconnector) is a device created from the corresponding
circuit-breakers (of which it features the same overall dimensions, versions, fastening mechanisms
and ability to be fitted with accessories).
The main function of these devices is to disconnect the circuit they are installed in. In the open
position, the disconnector disconnects and guarantees a sufficient insulation distance (between the
contacts) to assure safety and to prevent an electrical arc from striking.
Applications
Switch-disconnectors are generally used as:
XT1D Q general disconnectors of subswitchboards;
Q operating and disconnecting devices for lines, pan-assembliess or groups of equipment;
Q bus-ties;
Q general disconnecting devices for groups of machines;
Q general group disconnecting devices for motor operation and protection;
Q insulation of small tertiary distribution units.
Protection
A disconnector is unable to automatically break the short-circuit or overload current. For this rea-
son, each switch-disconnector must be protected on the supply side by a coordinated device that
safeguards it against short-circuits. The circuit-breaker able to act as a protection for each switch-
disconnector is indicated in the table below.
XT3D
Category of use (G2.11)
The CEI EN 60947-3 Standard defines the utilisation categories for disconnectors in accordance
with the table below. Tmax XT disconnectors comply with the AC21A, AC22A and AC23A utilisation
categories.
Class of use
Infrequent Frequent Typical applications
operation operation
AC-21A AC-21B Control of resistive loads with overloads of modest entity
AC-22A AC-22B Control of mixed resistive and inductive loads with overloads of modest entity
AC-23A AC-23B Control of motors or other highly inductive loads
XT4D
Characteristics of switch-disconnectors
XT1D XT3D XT4D
(G2.1)
Size [A] 160 250 250
Rated operating current in class AC21, Ie(G.2.12) [A] 160 250 250
Poles [Nr.] 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
(AC) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690 690
Rated service voltage, Ue(G2.4)
(DC) [V] 500 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp(G2.6) [kV] 8 8 8
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min [V] 3000 3000 3000
(Min) Disconnector only [kA] 2.8 5.3 5.3
Rated breaking capacity
in short-circuit, Icm(G2.10) (Max) With automatic
[kA] 187 105 105
circuit-breaker on supply side
(G2.9)
Rated short-time withstand current for 1s, Icw [kA] 2 3.6 3.6
Fixed, Fixed, Fixed, Withdrawable,
Versions
Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in
2/24
1SDC210033D0201
400Hz installations
The circuit-breakers used for power distribution can operate in alternating current at different fre-
quencies from 50/60Hz (frequencies which the rated performance of the apparatus refers to) so
long as the appropriate derating coefficients are applied.
At 400Hz, the performance of the circuit-breakers is reclassified so as to take the following phe-
nomena into account:
Q an increase in the skin effect and increased inductive reactance in a way that is directly propor-
tional to the frequency, overheat the conductors or the copper components that normally carry
the current in the circuit-breaker;
Q lengthening of the hysteresis loop and reduction of the magnetic saturation value, which conse-
quently varies the forces associated with the magnetic field to a given current value.
By and large, these phenomena influence the behaviour of both the thermomagnetic trip units and
the current interrupting parts of the circuit-breaker.
Consult the “Electrical installation handbook” ABB SACE guide for further details.
All the circuit-breakers in the SACE Tmax XT family equipped with thermomagnetic or electronic
trip units (except for the Ekip M-I, Ekip M-LIU and Ekip M-LRIU trip units) can be used in 400Hz
installations. The 10A and 25A settings for operation at 400Hz are only available on request.
Contact ABB SACE for more details about performance derating.
2/25
1SDC210033D0201
Communication system
The XT2 and XT4 moulded-case circuit-breakers, equipped with Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG
or Ekip M-LRIU trip unit and Ekip Com dialogue module, can be integrated in supervision systems
for control and management of electrical and technological plants.
With XT2 and XT4, equipped with thermomagnetic trip units, Ekip Com dialogue module and Elec-
tronic Motor, it is possible to read the state of the circuit-breaker remotely and to operate it.
Protocols available, for communication on bus(G5.4) network with circuit-breakers XT2 and XT4, are:
Q Modbus RTU (standard protocol of ABB SACE);
Q ProfiBus-DP (usable with ABB SACE devices, jointly with EP010 accessory);
Q DeviceNet (usable with ABB SACE devices, jointly with EP010 accessory).
Necessaries accessories for communications are:

Q Ekip Com communication module and electronic auxiliary contacts (1Q + 1SY) included in the
Ekip Com module. For further details about the Ekip Com communication module, see the
paragraph dedicated to this in the Accessories chapter;
Q Electronic motor operator MOE-E;
Q EP010- Field Bus Plug.
Configuration 1: Supervision (Electronic trip unit and Ekip Com)
+
24 V –
Modbus
Positioned in the right-hand slot of the circuit-breaker, the Ekip Com accessory connects to the Ekip
LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU trip unit via connector supplied. Four cables come out of Ekip Com,
of which two are required for auxiliary supply and two for connection to the Modbus.
This configuration allows you to:
Q read the measurements and settings from the electronic trip unit in remote mode;
Q program the electronic trip unit in remote mode;
Q know the state of the circuit-breaker (Open/Closed/Tripped) in remote mode.
Consult the Electric Diagrams chapter for further details about wiring.
2/26
1SDC210033D0201
Configuration 2: Supervision and Remote control (Thermomagnetic trip unit, Ekip Com and
MOE-E)
+
24 V –
+
Modbus
The Ekip Com accessory, positioned in the right-hand slot of the circuit-breaker, is connected with
the thermomagnetic trip unit by means of the connector supplied with the Ekip Com, and with the
MOE-E by means of the connector on the rear of the MOE-E.
4 cables come out of the Ekip Com, of which 2 are needed for the auxiliary power supply and 2 for
connection to the Modbus.
With this configuration it is possible to:
Q read the Open/Closed/Tripped state of the circuit-breaker remotely;
Q open/close the circuit-breaker remotely.
For further details regarding cabling of the various devices, please refer to the chapter on Electric
Diagrams.
Configuration 3: Supervision and Remote Control (Electronic trip unit, Ekip Com and MOE-E)
+
24 V –
+
Modbus
Connector is to be provided by the Customer

(PDP22 for Profibus, DNP21 for Devicenet)
LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU trip unit via connector supplied with Ekip Com and to the MOE-E
via connector be present on MOE-E behind. Four cables come out of Ekip Com of which two are
required for auxiliary supply, two for connection to the Modbus.
This configuration allows you to:
Q read the measurements and settings from the solid-state release in remote mode;
Q read the state of the circuit-breaker (Open/Closed/Tripped) in remote mode;
Q open/close the circuit-breaker in remote mode.
Consult the Electric Diagrams chapter for further details about wiring.
2/27
1SDC210033D0201
Communication system
Configuration 4: EP010 - Fieldbus Plug (Electronic trip unit, Ekip Com and EP010)
+
24 V –
+ Modbus
EP010
LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU trip unit via connector supplied and to the MOE-E via connector be
present on MOE-E behind (MOE-E connection is optional for this configuration). Four cables come
out of Ekip Com, of which two are required for auxiliary supply, two for connection to the EP010.
Connection of the EP010 to the network is to be made by the Customer and depends on the Field-
bus plug connector used.
With this configuration, it is possible to:
Q make the SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers communicate in a network with Profibus or Devicenet
comunication protocol;
Q read the measurements and settings from the solid-state release in remote mode;
Q read the state of the circuit-breaker (Open/Closed/Tripped) in remote mode;
Q open/close the circuit-breaker in remote mode.
Configuration 5: Interface from front panel (Electronic trip unit, Ekip Com and HMI030 Unit)
With XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers, equipped with electronical trip unit Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-
LRIU, in addiction with the interface unit HMI030, it’s possible to visualize directly on the panel door
the mainly electrical magnitude values and the intervention threshold for the imposed protection.
The necessary accessories, useful to permit the lecture directly from the front of the switchboard
are:
Q interface device HMI030;
Q communication module Ekip Com.
+
24 V –
HMI030
Modbus
The Ekip Com accessory, positioned in the right-hand slot of the circuit-breaker, is connected to the
Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU trip unit by means of supplied connector. Four cables come out
of the Ekip Com, two of which are needed for the auxiliary power supply and two for connection to
the HMI030.
This configuration makes it possible to read the measurements and settings from the electronic trip
unit by means of the HMI030 accessory positioned on the front of the panel.
For further details on cabling the various different devices, refer to the Electric Diagram Chapter.
2/28
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Index
Versions and types
Fixed part of plug-in and withdrawable versions ................................................................... 3/2
Conversion kits ....................................................................................................................... 3/3
Mechanical Accessories
Connection terminals ............................................................................................................. 3/5
Terminal covers, phase separators and sealable screws for terminal covers .......................3/12
Rotary handle operating mechanism ....................................................................................3/12
IP54 Protection ......................................................................................................................3/13
Front for operating lever mechanism ....................................................................................3/13
Locks .....................................................................................................................................3/14
Rear mechanical interlock .....................................................................................................3/16
Bracket for fixing on DIN rail .................................................................................................3/16
Flanges ..................................................................................................................................3/16
Electrical Accessories
Service releases ....................................................................................................................3/17
Auxiliary contacts ..................................................................................................................3/19
Motor operators ....................................................................................................................3/23
Connectors for electrical accessories ...................................................................................3/27
Residual current releases ......................................................................................................3/28
Accessories for electronic trip units

Ekip Display ...........................................................................................................................3/34
Ekip LED Meter .....................................................................................................................3/35
SACE PR212/CI contactor operator......................................................................................3/35
Current sensor for external neutral........................................................................................3/36
Connection accessories ........................................................................................................3/36
Communication devices and systems

HMI030 interface on the front of the switchboard ................................................................3/37
Ekip Com ...............................................................................................................................3/38
EP010 - FBP ..........................................................................................................................3/38
Ekip Connect .........................................................................................................................3/39
Test and configuration accessories

Ekip T&P ................................................................................................................................3/40
Ekip TT ..................................................................................................................................3/41
Automatic network-generator transfer unit ATS021-ATS022 ..........................................3/42
Compatibility of accessories ..............................................................................................3/44
3/1
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Versions and types
Tmax XT automatic circuit-breakers are available in the following versions:

Q FIXED. Fixed circuit-breakers consist of a current-interrupting part connected to the trip unit, to
be installed on the back plate of the cubicle or on a DIN rail;
Q PLUG-IN. Plug-in circuit-breakers consist of a fixed part that must be installed on the back plate
of the cubicle, and of a moving part, obtained from the fixed circuit-breaker plus the relative kit
that converts it from the fixed version into the moving part of the plug-in version;
Q WITHDRAWABLE. Withdrawable circuit-breakers consist of a fixed part that must be installed
Fixed circuit-breaker
on the back plate of the cubicle equipped with side runners to allow the moving part to be eas-
ily racked out and in, winch is obtained from the fixed circuit-breaker plus the relative kit that
converts it from the fixed version into the withdrawable moving part. To obtain the withdrawable
version, a front accessory to be applied onto the front of the circuit-breaker must be ordered so
as to maintain the IP40 degree of protection over the entire isolation run of the circuit-breaker.
If the plug-in circuit-breaker is fitted with electrical accessories, the appropriate connectors for isola-
tion of the relative auxiliary circuits must also be ordered on the other hand, for the withdrawable
version there are dedicated accessories, fitted with connectors which allow automatic disconnec-
tion in the case of racking-out (consult the “connection of electrical accessories” section in the
Accessories chapter).
Starting from the fixed version, SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers can easily be converted into the
plug-in and withdrawable versions using the relative conversion kits.
The moving part can always be obtained in the required version, fully pre-engineered in the factory,
by ordering the fixed circuit-breaker and the conversion kit at the same time.
Version
Fixed Plug-in Withdrawable
XT1 Q Q
Plug-in circuit-breaker
XT2 Q Q Q
XT3 Q Q
XT4 Q Q Q
Fixed part of plug-in and withdrawable versions

The fixed parts of the plug-in/withdrawable versions are available with front terminals (F) or with
horizontal or vertical rear terminals (HR/VR). The terminals are factory-mounted in the horizontal po-
sition. In case of need, the Customer can easily rotate the terminals into the vertical position. These
fixed parts can be equipped with the same terminal, terminal-cover and phase separator kits used
for the fixed circuit-breakers, using the proper adapter.
Withdrawable circuit-breaker The fixed parts of a plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker can be installed at a distance of 50mm
from the back of the panel or at 70mm as shown in the picture. Installation at 50mm is only compul-
sory in the case where rear vertical or horizontal terminals (HR/VR) are used.
Fixing at 50mm
Fixing at 70mm
3/2
1SDC210033D0201
Conversion kits
The following conversion kits can be obtained in order to create the different versions:
Q Kit for converting the fixed circuit-breaker into the moving part of plug-in/withdrawable
versions. The conversion kit converts the fixed circuit-breaker into the moving part of plug-in/
withdrawable versions. Only when withdrawable versions are made is it essential to order an
accessory to apply to the front of the circuit-breaker so as to maintain the IP40 degree of protec-
Conversion kit for turning a fixed tion over the entire isolation run. This accessory can be chosen from:
circuit-breaker into the moving
– front for lever operating mechanism (FLD);
part of a plug-in circuit-breaker
– motor operator (MOE);
– direct or transmitted rotary handle operating mechanisms (RHD or RHE).
In the case where no accessory to be applied onto the front is indicated, the front for lever op-
erating mechanism (FLD) is automatically included in the order.
Q kit for converting the fixed part of plug-in versions into the fixed part of withdrawable ver-
sions. The kit comprises:
– a guide for turning the fixed part of the plug-in circuit-breaker into the fixed part of the with-
drawable circuit-breaker;
– a racking-out rotary handle that allows the moving part to be inserted and withdrawn. The
mechanism allows the circuit-breaker to be set to the isolated position (with the power and
Conversion kit for turning a fixed auxiliary circuits disconnected) with the compartment door closed, all to the advantage of
circuit-breaker into the moving part operator safety. The rotary handle can only be inserted when the circuit-breaker is open.
of a withdrawable circuit-breaker Once it has been removed or withdrawn, the circuit-breaker can be set to the open/closed
position;
– a flange for the compartment door, which replaces the one supplied with the fixed version of
the circuit-breaker.
Q Kit for converting fixed type into the plug-in version for RC Sel residual current devices
for XT2-XT4. RC Sel four-pole residual current devices for XT2 e XT4 can be converted from the
fixed version into the plug-in version using the special kit.
Q Kit for converting plug-in types into the withdrawable version for RC Sel residual cur-
rent devices for XT2-XT4. RC Sel four-pole residual current devices for XT2 and XT4 can
be converted from the plug-in version to the withdrawable version using the special kit, which
comprises a bellows to apply to the front of the residual current device so as to allow it and the
residual current part to be withdrawn when the panel door is closed. This kit can also be as-
sembled on fixed circuit-breakers fitted with the front part for locks or the direct rotary handle,
thus adding to the range of uses for residual current devices.
In the plug-in to withdrawable conversion kit, there is also a 6 pin connector to be applied onto
the right side of the circuit-breaker to facilitate disconnection of the auxiliary circuits connected
to the residual current device.
This kit contains also the shunt opening release of the residual current device dedicated to the
Conversion kit for turning a fixed part
of plug-in version into the fixed part
withdrawable version, which is fitted with a connector for the fixed part and the moving part.
of a withdrawable version
3/3
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Versions and types
Plug-in version
+ + =
Fixed part of Fixed Conversion kit for turning Plug-in

plug-in circuit-breaker a fixed circuit-breaker into circuit-breaker
the moving part of a plug-in
circuit-breaker
Withdrawable version
1st solution
+ + + =
Fixed part of Fixed Conversion kit for turning Frontal accessory Withdrawable
withdrawable circuit-breaker a fixed circuit-breaker FLD(1) circuit-breaker
into the moving part of a
withdrawable circuit-breaker
2nd solution
+ + + + =
Fixed part Conversion kit for turning Fixed Conversion kit for turning Frontal accessory Withdrawable
of plug-in a fixed part of plug-in circuit-breaker a fixed circuit-breaker FLD(1) circuit-breaker
version into the fixed part into the moving part of a
of a withdrawable version withdrawable circuit-breaker
(1)
Frontal accessory mandatory. If not specified in the order, the FLD is supplied automatically
3/4
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Mechanical Accessories XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

F- Front Q Q Q Q
EF - Front extended Q Q Q Q
ES - Front extended spread Q Q Q Q
FCCu - Front for copper cables Q Q Q Q
FCuAl - Front for copper/aluminium cables Q Q Q Q
FB - For flexible busbars Q Q Q Q
Terminals
MC - Multi-cable Q Q Q Q
R - Rear orientated Q Q Q Q
EF - Extended front for the fixed part Q Q Q Q
HR/VR - Horizontal rear / Vertical rear for
Q Q Q Q
fixed part
HR for RC - for residual current release Q
RHD - Direct rotary handle Q Q Q Q
Rotary handle operating RHE - Transmitted rotary handle Q Q Q Q
mechanism RHE-LH - Wide transmitted rotary handle Q Q Q Q
RHS - Side rotary handle Q Q Q Q
Front for lever operating mechanism FLD - Front for locks Q Q
Padlock device Q Q Q Q
Locks on CB
Key lock Q Q Q Q
Locks on handle Key lock Q Q Q Q
Locks on FLD Key lock Q Q
Key lock Q Q Q Q
Locks on Motor Operator
Key lock against manual operation Q Q
Look for fixed part Key lock Q Q
Rear interlock Interlock Q Q Q Q
Bracket for DIN rail Bracket Q Q Q Q
Consult the relative section for more details.
Connection terminals
Connection terminals allow the circuit-breaker to be connected to the system in the way most suited
to the installation requirements. By and large they consist of:
Q front terminals: for connecting cables or busbars directly from the front of the circuit-breaker;
Q rear terminals: for installing circuit-breakers in segregated panels with rear access.
Where possible, the terminals have laser marking on the surface indicating the tightening torques for
the correct isolation of cables and bars.
Fixed version
The part of the standard equipment, fixed version SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers are supplied with
front terminals (F). However, they can be fitted with the following types of terminals as accessories
thanks to the special kits:
Q extended front (EF);
Q extended spread front (ES);
Q front for copper/aluminium cables (FCCuAI). A pitch adapter must be applied to the terminal
zone of the circuit-breaker to ensure that copper and aluminium cables with sections of up to
240mm2 can be connected to all the circuit-breakers. The pitch adapter is automatically sup-
plied when it is necessary (see table page 3/9);
Q front for copper cables (FCCu);
Q for flexible busbars (FB);
Q multicable (MC);
Q rear oriented (R).
3/5
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Plug-in and withdrawable versions

Fixed part of plug-in and withdrawable version circuit-breakers are normally suplied with extended
front terminals (EF) or horizontal/vertical rear terminals (HR/VR).
The terminals are factory-mounted in the horizontal position. In case of need, the Customer can
easily rotate the terminals into the vertical position.
A fixed part with front terminals (EF) can be converted into a fixed part with rear terminals (HR/VR)
by ordering the appropriate terminal kit. The fixed parts can also be fitted with the same types of
terminals available on the fixed circuit-breaker after an adapter has been installed on the terminal
zone of the fixed part itself. Consequently, the following types of connection terminals are also avail-
able for the fixed part:
Q extended spread front (ES);
Q for copper-aluminium cables (FCCuAI);
Q for copper cables (FCCu);
Q for flexible busbars (FB);
Q multi-cable (MC).
The adapter reproduces the terminal zone of the fixed circuit-breaker. This means that fixed parts
can also be equipped with the same terminal covers and phase separators as those used for fixed
circuit-breakers.
H3 H1 H2
Fixing at 50mm
Fixing at 70mm
Fixed part adapter

H1 H2 H3 fixed part
Circuit- breakers fixed part circuit-breaker with two adapters
[mm] [mm] [mm]
XT1 146 134 181
Fixed part adapter
XT2 153 134 188
XT3 166 154 225
XT4 182 164 228
3/6
1SDC210033D0201
Front terminals - F
CB. Vers. Busbar dimensions Cable terminals Tightening H Terminal covers H Separators
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
W min W max H Ø D min D max W Ø Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
/Terminal
XT1 F 13 16 7.5 6.5 – 5 16 6.5 M6 6Nm R R – S R R
XT2 F 13 20 7.5 6.5 2.5 5 20 6.5 M6 6Nm R R – S R R
XT3 F 17 24 9.5 8.5 – 8 24 8.5 M8 8Nm R – R S R R
XT4 F 17 25 10 8.5 5 8 25 8.5 M8 8Nm R – R S R R
Front terminal - F F terminal with cable lug F terminal with busbar
Front extended terminals - EF

CB Vers. Busbar dimensions MAX Cable terminals Tightening H Terminal covers H Separators
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
W D Ø W Ø Terminal Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
/CB /Terminal
XT1 F 20 4 8.5 20 5 M6 6Nm M8 9Nm – R – – S R
XT2 F 20 4 8.5 20 4 M6 6Nm M8 9Nm – R – – S R
XT3 F 20 6 10 20 6 M8 8Nm M10 18Nm – – R – S R
XT4 F 20 10 10 20 10 M8 8Nm M10 18Nm – – R – S R
Front extended terminal - EF EF terminal with cable lug EF terminal with busbar
W Width F Fixed
H Hole Heigth P Plug-in
D Depth W Withdrawable
Ø Diameter
S Standard
D W
R On Request
3/7
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Front extended spread terminals - ES

CB Vers. Busbar dimensions MAX Cable terminals Tightening H Terminal covers H Separators
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
W D Ø W Ø Terminal Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
/CB /Terminal
XT1 F-P 25 4 8.5 25 8.5 M6 6Nm M8 9Nm – – – – – S
XT2 F-P-W 30 4 10.5 30 10.5 M6 6Nm M10 18Nm – – – – – S
XT3 F-P 30 4 10.5 30 10.5 M8 8Nm M10 18Nm – – – – – S
XT4 F-P-W 30 6 10.5 30 10.5 M8 8Nm M10 18Nm – – – – – S
Front extended spread ES terminal with cable lug ES terminal with busbar
terminal - ES
Terminals for copper cables - FCCu

CB Type of Vers. Cable Tightening L H Terminal covers H Separators
terminal [mm2] cable [mm] [mm]
stripping
Rigid Flexible Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
[mm]
/Terminal
internal F-P 1x1…70 1x1…50 R R – S(1) R R
XT1 12x12mm 7Nm 12
internal F-P – 2x2.5…35 R R – S(1) R R
(1)
internal F-P-W 1x1…95 1x1…70 R R – S R R
XT2 14x14mm 7Nm 14
internal F-P-W – 2x1…50 R R – S(1) R R
internal F-P 1x6…185 1x6…150 R – R S(1) R R
XT3 18x18mm 10Nm 12
internal F–P – 2x6…70 R – R S(1) R R
internal F-P-W 1x6…185 1x6…150 R – R S(1) R R
XT4 18x18 mm 10Nm 12
internal F-P-W – 2x6…70 R – R S(1) R R
(1)
Phase separators supplied as standard with basic version circuit-breaker
FCCu terminal FCCu terminal with cable FCCu terminal with busbar
W Width F Fixed
Ø Diameter
S Standard
D W
R On Request
3/8
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
CB Type of Vers. Cable Tightening L H Terminal covers H Separators
terminal [mm2] cable [mm] [mm]
Rigid Flexible Terminal Cable or busbar stripping 2 50 60 25 100 200
/CB /Terminal [mm]
internal F-P 1x1.5…50 1x 1.5…50 M5 5Nm Ø 9.5mm 7Nm 16 R R – S R R

XT1 external F-P 1x35…95 NO M6 6Nm Ø 14mm 13.5Nm 16 – S – – – –
external(1) F-P 1x150…240 NO M6 6Nm Ø 24mm 31Nm 24 ADAPTER
internal F-P-W 1x1…95 1x1…70 – – Ø 14mm 7Nm 14 – R – S R R
(1)
external F-P-W 1x150…240 NO M6 6Nm Ø 24mm 31Nm 24 ADAPTER
XT2
external(1) F-P-W 1x70…185 NO M6 6Nm Ø 18mm 25Nm 20 – S – – – –
external(1) F-P-W 2x35...95 NO M6 6Nm Ø 16mm 12Nm 18/33 – – S – – –
internal F-P 1x70…185 NO – – Ø 18mm 16Nm 20 R – R S R R
XT3 external(1) F-P 1x150…240 NO M8 8Nm Ø 24mm 31Nm 24 ADAPTER
external(1) F-P 2x35…150 NO M8 8Nm Ø 18mm 16Nm 22/42 – – S – – –
internal F-P-W 1x1...150 1x1...150 – – Ø 17mm 10Nm 21 – – R S R R
XT4 external(1) F-P-W 1x150…240 NO M8 8Nm Ø 24mm 31Nm 24 ADAPTER
(1)
external F-P-W 2x35…150 NO M8 8Nm Ø 18mm 16Nm 22/42 – – S – – –
(1)
Take-up auxiliary voltage device included
Internal FCCuAl terminal for Internal FCCuAl terminal for External FCCuAl terminal for FCCuAl internal terminal FCCuAl external terminal
copper/aluminium cables copper and aluminium cable copper/aluminium cables with cable with cables
with take-up of auxiliary voltage
Adaptor for FCCuAl terminals up to 240 mm2
H Dimensions [mm]
Circuit-breaker Poles
[WxHxD]
3 105x50x68
D W XT1
4 140x50x68
Pitch adapter 3 105x50x68
XT2
4 140x50x68
3 105x50x68
XT3
4 140x50x68
3 105x50x68
XT4
4 140x50x68
Note: With XT1 and XT2 the adaptor increases the width of the circuit-breaker
W Width F Fixed
Ø Diameter
S Standard
D W
R On Request
3/9
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Terminals for flexible busbars - FB

CB Type of Vers. Busbar dimensions Busbar dimensions Tightening H Terminal covers H Separators
terminal MIN [mm] MAX [mm] [Nm] [mm] [mm]
W D Nr W D Nr Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
/Terminal
XT1 internal F-P 10 0.8 2 10 0.8 9 7Nm R R – S(1) R R
(1)
XT2 internal F-P-W 10 0.8 2 10 0.8 9 7Nm R R – S R R
XT3 internal F-P 16 0.8 2 16 0.8 10 10Nm R – R S(1) R R
XT4 internal F-P-W 16 0.8 2 16 0.8 10 10Nm R – R S(1) R R
(1)
Phase separators supplied as standard with basic version circuit-breaker
Terminal for flexible busbars (FB) FB terminal with flexible busbars
Multi-cable terminals - MC
CB Vers. Cable Tightening L H Terminal covers H Separators
[mm2] cable [mm] [mm]
stripping
Rigid Flexible Terminal Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
[mm]
/CB /terminal
XT1 F-P 6x2.5…35 6x2.5…25 M6 6Nm Ø8 7Nm 10, 20, 30 – S – – – –
XT2 F-P-W 6x2.5…35 6x2.5…25 M6 6Nm Ø8 7Nm 10, 20, 30 – S – – – –
XT3(1) F-P 6x2.5…35 6x2.5…25 M8 8Nm Ø8 7Nm 15, 30 – – S – – –
XT4(1) F-P-W 6x2.5…35 6x2.5…25 M8 8Nm Ø8 7Nm 15, 30 – – S – – –
(1)
Take up auxiliary voltage device included
Multi-cable terminals (MC) Multi-cable terminals with cables
Rear horizontal terminals - R

CB Vers. Busbar dimensions MAX Tightening H Terminal covers H Separators
[mm] [mm] [mm]
W H D Ø Terminal Cable or busbar 2 50 60 25 100 200
/CB /terminal
XT1 F 15 7.5 5 6.5 M5 5Nm M6 6Nm S R – – – –
XT2 F 20 9 4 8.5 M6 6Nm M8 9Nm S – – – – –
XT3 F 20 9 6 8.5 M8 8Nm M8 9Nm S – R – – –
XT4 F 20 9 6 8.5 M8 8Nm M8 9Nm S – – – – –
Rear horizontal terminals (R) R terminal with horizontal busbar R terminal with vertical busbar
3/10
1SDC210033D0201
Extended front terminals for fixed part - EF
CB Vers. Busbar dimensions MAX Cable terminals Tightening Rear Separators
[mm] [mm] [mm]
W P Ø W Ø Terminal/ Cable or busbar 90
CB /Terminal
XT1 P 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT2 P-W 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT3 P 20 6 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT4 P-W 20 10 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
EF terminals for fixed part
Rear flat horizontal terminals for fixed part - HR

[mm] [mm] [mm]
W P Ø W Ø Terminal Cable or busbar 90
/CB /Terminal
XT1 P 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT2 P-W 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT3 P 20 6 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT4 P-W 20 10 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
HR terminals for fixed part
Rear flat vertical terminals for fixed part - VR

[mm] [mm] [mm]
W P Ø W Ø Terminal Cable or busbar 90
/CB /Terminal
XT1 P 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT2 P-W 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT3 P 20 6 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
XT4 P-W 20 10 8.5 20 8.5 6Nm 9Nm R
VR terminals for fixed part
W Width F Fixed
Ø Diameter
S Standard
D W
R On Request
3/11
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Terminal covers, phase separators and sealable screws for

terminal covers
Terminal covers are applied to the circuit-breaker to prevent accidental contact with live parts, thus
providing protection against direct contacts. The terminal covers are pre-punched for know-out on
the front to facilitate installation of busbars and/or cables, guaranteeing correct insulation.
The phase separator partitions increase the insulation characteristics between the phases on a level
with the connections. They are mounted from the front, even when the circuit-breaker has already
been installed, by inserting them into the corresponding slots.
Terminal covers The table lists the various different terminal covers and phase separators available for each SACE
Tmax XT circuit-breaker. The terminal covers/phase separators able to guarantee adequate circuit-
breaker installation and correct insulation are listed in the “Connection Terminals” section of the
Accessories Chapter alongside each terminal.
The lead sealing kit consists of screws which, when applied to the terminal covers, prevent their
removal, providing protection against direct contacts and tampering. The screws can be locked
with wire and lead seals.
Each sealing kit consists of two screws. The maximum number of sealable screws that can be used
for each circuit-breaker is given in the table below.
XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

Phase separators
3p 4p 3p 4p 3p 4p 3p 4p
HTC - High terminal covers [mm] 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60
LTC - Low terminal covers [mm] 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Max number sealable screws
[No.] 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
for each terminal cover
Phase separator - low [mm] 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Phase separator - medium [mm] 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Sealable screws Phase separator - high [mm] 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Rear phase separator for FP [mm] 90 90 90 90
Rotary handle operating mechanism

Operating device that allows the circuit-breaker to be operated by means of a rotary handle, which
makes the circuit-breaker easier to open and close thanks to its ergonomic handgrip.
Different types of handles are available:
Q direct (RHD): installed directly on the front of the circuit-breaker. Allows it to be operated fron-
tally;
Q transmitted (RHE): installed on the panel door. Allows the circuit-breaker to be operated by
means of a rod which acts on a base installed on the front of the circuit-breaker;
Q lateral left (RHS-L) and lateral right (RHS-R): installed directly on the front of the circuit-breaker.
Allows it to be operated from the side.
The wide handle grip (LH) only is also available, which can be combined with the transmitted handle
(RHE) and with the lateral handle (RHS).
Direct rotary handle (RHD) Transmitted rotary handle (RHE) (LH) Handle grip (RHS) Lateral handle
3/12
1SDC210033D0201
All rotary handles are available in two versions:
Q standard: grey colour;
Q emergency: red on a yellow background. Suitable for operating machine tools.
Rotary handles can be ordered:

Q by specifying one single sales code (for RHD, RHE, RHE LH, RHS L/R);
Q by indicating the following three devices (only for RHE):
– rotary handle on compartment door with normal standard handgrip (RHE_H) or emergency
handgrip (RHE_H_EM);
– 500mm transmission rod (RHE_S). The minimum and maximum distances between the fixing
plate and the door are 60.5mm and 470.5mm;
– base on the circuit-breaker to fix to the circuit-breaker (RHE_B).
Use of the rotary handle is an alternative to the motor operator and to all accessories of the front
type.
The rotary handles can be locked by means of a vast range of key locks and padlocks (consult the
“locks” section of the Accessories chapter).
The direct and transmitted rotary operating mechanisms allow early contacts to be used on closing
so as to supply the undervoltage release in advance of circuit-breaker closing (consult the “early
auxiliary contacts” section of the Accessories chapter).
IP54 Protection
Device which can be applied onto the transmitted rotary and lateral handle allowing IP54 degree of
protection(G.1.11) to be achieved.
IP54 protection
Front for operating lever mechanism

This device can be installed on the front of the circuit-breaker and allows it to be locked with key
locks and padlocks.
The front for lever operating mechanism can only be installed on XT2 and XT4 three-pole and four-
pole circuit-breakers. The front for lever operating mechanism can be fitted with a vast range of key
locks and padlocks (see the “locks” section of the Accessories chapter).
Front for locks
3/13
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Locks
Padlocks or key locks that prevent the circuit-breaker from being closed and/or opened. They can
be fitted:
Q directly on the front of the circuit-breaker;
Key lock Q on the rotary handle operating mechanism;
Q on the front for lever operating mechanism;
Q on the motor;
Q to the fixed and withdrawable part, to prevent the moving part from being inserted;
Q on the front of the thermomagnetic trip unit, to prevent the adjuster of the thermal part from be-
ing tampered with.
All locks that hold the circuit-breaker in the open position ensure circuit isolation in accordance with
the IEC 60947-2 Standard. In the closed position, the locks do not prevent the mechanism from
releasing after a fault or remote control.
Fixed padlock in open position
Fixed padlock in open/closed

position
Circuit-breaker with removable Circuit-breaker with fixed Circuit-breaker with fixed

padlock in open position padlock in open position padlock in open/close position
Removable padlock
in open position
RHD with key lock RHE with key lock FLD with key lock
Key lock/padlock for

withdrawable fixed part
MOD with key lock MOE with key lock Withdrawable fixed part
with key lock/padlock
3/14
1SDC210033D0201
Optional/
Circuit- Position of Type Removability
Type of lock Standard
breaker circuit-breaker lock of lock of key
supply
padlocks max 3 padlocks
XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN / CLOSED
Ø 7mm stem (not supplied)
–
PLL
Fixed padlock device padlocks max 3 padlocks
XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN
–
PLL
Removable XT1, XT3 Optional OPEN
–
Circuit- padlock device
breaker
Ronis Same key
XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN
(A, B, C, D type)
KLC Ronis
Key lock (5) Different key
Ronis
XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN / CLOSED
Same key
Ronis
Same key
RHL Ronis
Rotary XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN
Key lock(1) Different key
handle
Ronis
(RHD/RHE/ XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN / CLOSED OPEN / CLOSED
Different key
RHE-LH/
RHS) padlocks max 3 padlocks
Padlock device XT1…XT4 Standard OPEN
–
DOOR LOCKED WHEN
Door lock(4) XT1…XT4 Standard
CIRCUIT-BREAKER CLOSED
– –
Padlock device XT2, XT4 Standard OPEN
–
DOOR LOCKED WHEN
Door lock XT2, XT4 Standard
CIRCUIT-BREAKER CLOSED
– –
Frontal for Ronis
XT2, XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN
operating Same key
lever RHL Ronis
(FLD) XT2, XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN
Key lock(1) Different key
Ronis
XT2, XT4 Optional OPEN / CLOSED OPEN / CLOSED
Different key
Padlock device XT1…XT4 Standard OPEN
–
Ronis
Key lock on motor XT1…XT4 Optional OPEN OPEN
Different keys
MOL-D
Motor MOL-S Ronis
(MOD, MOE, Same keys
MOE-E) Key lock against
Ronis WITH LOCK
manual operation XT1…XT4 Optional MANUAL
key INSERTED
MOL-M (2)
Ronis key Different +
Key WITHDRAWN / INSERTED
XT2, XT4 Optional
Padlock WITHDRAWN
padlocks max 3 padlocks –
Ronis key Same +
KLF-FP XT2, XT4 Optional
Padlock WITHDRAWN
Fixed part of Key lock / padlock Ø 6mm stem (not supplied)
withdrawable for fixed part of Giussani key Different +
withdrawable device Key WITHDRAWN / INSERTED
XT2, XT4 Optional
Padlock WITHDRAWN
Giussani key Same +
XT2, XT4 Optional
Padlock WITHDRAWN
XT1, XT3 Optional – – –

Lock of thermal
Trip unit
regulation (3)
XT2, XT4 Standard – – –
(1)
On the transmitted rotary handle (RHE), the lock is mounted on the base. The key lock is not available on the lateral handle (RHS).
(2)
Only for MOE and MOE-E.
(3)
Applied to the cover of the circuit-breakers on a level with the regulator of the thermal element of thermomagnetic release TMD and prevents it from being tampered with.
(4)
This function can be totally inhibited by the customer when the handle is assembled by means of a simple operation that can be reversed if needed.
Moreover, if the door lock function is not disabled by the customer during the assembly phase, the door lock can be temporarily deactivated with a tool in exceptional cases, so that
the door can be opened without opening the circuit-breaker.
(5)
Incompatible with electrical accessories mounted in the third pole.
3/15
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Rear mechanical interlock

Support, designed for installation on the rear of two circuit-breakers to be interlocked, and which,
by means of linkages, prevents the two circuit-breakers it is installed on from closing simultaneously.
The circuit-breakers in the Tmax XT family are interlocked two-by-two (IO-OI-OO) by means of a
chassis and special plates. Interlocked circuit-breakers can be in fixed, plug-in or withdrawable ver-
sion. Both circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors in the three-pole and four-pole versions can
be interlocked.
Interlock
The acceptable combinations are:
Q XT1-XT1
Q XT1-XT3
Q XT2-XT4
Q XT2-XT2
Q XT3-XT3
Q XT4-XT4.
The following equipment must be ordered to make the rear interlock:

Q a vertical or horizontal chassis;
Q a plate for each circuit-breaker to be interlocked.
+ =
Interlock - Chassis Two Plates Interlock
Bracket for fixing on DIN rail

Support designed for installation on the back of the circuit-breakers to simplify assembly on stand-
ardized DIN EN 50022 rail.
The following can be installed on DIN EN 50022 rail:
Q all Tmax XT circuit-breakers in the fixed three-pole or four-pole versions;
Q XT1, XT3 circuit-breakers equipped with RC Sel 200; RC Inst, RC Sel for XT1 and XT3 residual
current releases.
Bracket for fixing on DIN rail
Flanges
Plastic plate that acts as an interface between the circuit-breaker and the hole in the panel door. All
the Tmax XT series flanges are newly designed and do not require screws for installation. Flanges
are applied:
Q around the front part of the fixed/plug-in circuit-breaker (standard supply with the circuit-breaker);
Q around the operating lever for all fixed/plug-in/withdrawable version circuit-breakers (optional);
Q around the MOD or MOE motor operator (standard supply with MOD and MOE);
Q around the front for FLD locks (standard supply with FLD);
Q around the direct rotary handle operating mechanism (standard supply with RHD);
Q around the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism (standard supply with RHE);
XT1-XT3 circuit-breaker Q around the RC Inst, RC Sel for XT1 and XT3, RC Sel for XT2 and XT4 residual current release
with standard flange
(standard supply with residual current devices).
XT2-XT4 circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker with Rotary handle MOE MOD

with standard flange optional flange with flange with flange with flange
3/16
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Electrical Accessories XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

Shunt opening release SOR Q Q Q Q
Permanent shunt opening release PS-SOR Q Q Q Q
Undervoltage release UVR Q Q Q Q
Time-delay device for undervoltage release UVD Q Q Q Q
1Q 1SY 24V DC Q Q Q Q
3Q 1SY 24V DC – Q Q Q
1S51 24V DC – Q – Q
Auxiliary contacts 1Q 1SY 250V AC/DC Q Q Q Q
2Q 2SY 1S51 250V AC/DC – Q – Q
Q: open/close signalling contact
3Q 2SY 250V AC/DC – Q – Q
SY: trip signalling contact 3Q 1SY 250V AC/DC – Q Q Q
1S51 250V AC/DC – Q – Q
S51: electronic trip signalling contact
2Q 1SY 250V AC/DC Q Q Q Q
3Q on left 250V AC/DC Q Q Q Q
400V 1Q 1SY 400V AC – Q – Q
400V 2Q 400V AC – Q – Q
AUP-Racked-in Q Q Q Q
Position contacts
AUP-Racked-out – Q – Q
AUE-In handle Q Q Q Q
Early auxiliary contacts
AUE-Internal – Q – Q
MOD Q – Q –
Motor operator MOE – Q – Q
MOE-E – Q – Q
RC Inst Q – Q –
RC Sel 200 Q – – –
Residual current devices
RC Sel for XT1 XT3 Q – Q –
RC Sel for XT2 XT4 – Q – Q
RC Sel B Type – – Q –
Service releases
Shunt opening release (SOR). Allows the circuit-breaker to be opened by means of a non-per-
manent electrical control. Release operation is guaranteed for voltage between 70% and 110% of
the rated power supply voltage Un, in both alternating and direct current. SOR is equipped with a
Cabled SOR - PS SOR - UVR built-in limit contact to shut-off the power supply in the open position with the relay tripped.
A remote controlled emergency opening command can be created by connecting an opening but-
ton to the SOR.
Shunt opening release with permanent service (PS-SOR), unlike SOR, this version can be
continuously powered. The power input of PS SOR is much lower than the power input of SOR.
Undervoltage release (UVR). Allows the circuit-breaker to open when the release is subjected to
either a power failure or voltage drop. Opening, as prescribed in the Standard, is guaranteed when
the voltage is between 70% to 35% of Un. After tripping, the circuit-breaker can be closed again
if the voltage exceeds the 85% of Un. When the undervoltage release is nor energized, neither the
Cabled SOR - PS SOR - UVR circuit-breaker nor the main contacts can be closed. A remote controlled emergency opening com-
for withdrawable circuit-breaker
mand can be created by connecting an opening button to the UVR.
None of the service releases in the Tmax XT series require screws for installation. They are extremely
easy to fit. Just use slight pressure in the appropriate place. All service releases are available in two
versions:
Q cabled (AWG20 cable section -0.5mm2 up to 300V, AWG17 - 1mm2 up to 525V)):
– for fixed/plug-in circuit-breakers with 1m long cables;
– for withdrawable circuit-breakers with fixed part and moving part connector;
Uncabled Q not cabled:
SOR - PS SOR - UVR – for fixed/plug-in circuit-breakers with cables from 1.5 mm2 in section.
3/17
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
In circuit-breakers:
Q three-pole: as an alternative, SOR, PS-SOR or UVR can be installed in the slot on the left of the
operating lever;
Q four-pole: SOR, PS-SOR or UVR can be housed at the same time in the slot of the third and
fourth pole. If the circuit-breaker is the withdrawable type, the connector for the fourth pole must
be ordered to be able to install SOR, PS SOR and UVR in the fourth pole. If there is a residual
current release, the opening solenoid (SA) of the residual current device must be installed in the
slot of the third pole on the left of the operating lever.
SOR
SOR SOR PS-SOR
PS-SOR PS-SOR UVR
UVR UVR SA
SOR Electrical specifications

Version Max power absorbed on inrush Resistance
AC [VA] DC [W] Internal [ohm] External [ohm]
12V DC 50 2,67 0
24-30V AC/DC 50 50 11 0
48-60V AC/DC 60 60 62 0
110...127V AC-110...125V DC 50 50 248 0
220...240V AC-220...250V DC 50 50 930 0
380-440V AC 55 2300 0
480-525V AC 55 5830 0
PS SOR Electrical specification

Version Power absorbed during normal operation Resistance
24-30V AC/DC 6 6 162 0
48-60V AC/DC 4.5 4.5 586-930(1) 0
110...127V AC-110...125V DC 5 5 3720 0
220...240V AC-220...250V DC 5 5 13550 0
380-440V AC 7 20502 10000
480-525V AC 8.5 20502 15000
(1)
The two different values refer to the minimum-maximum value of the voltage used
UVR Electrical specification

Version Power absorbed during normal operation Resistance
24-30V AC/DC 1.5 1.5 399 0
48V AC/DC 1 1 1447 100
60V AC/DC 1 1 2405 100
110...127V AC-110...125V DC 2 2 8351 390
220...240V AC-220...250V DC 2.5 2.5 20502 9000
380-440V AC 3 20502 39000
480-525V AC 4 20502 59000
3/18
1SDC210033D0201
Time delay device for undervoltage release (UVD)
The undervoltage release (UVD) can be combined with an external electronic power supply time
delay which allows circuit-breaker opening to be delayed with preset and adjustable timing if the
power supply voltage of the release either drops or fails, thus preventing untimely tripping caused
by temporary faults. The time delay must be used with the undervoltage release (UVR) of the cor-
responding voltage.
A remote control positive safety opening command can be created by connecting an opening push-
button to the UVR combined with the UVD.
UVD - Electrical specifications

Time delay device for 24...30V AC/DC
undervoltage release
48...60V AC/DC
Power supply Voltage [V]
110...125V AC/DC
220...250V AC/DC
Settable delay [s] 0.25 - 0.5 - 0.75 - 1 - 1.25 - 2 - 2.5 - 3
Opening time tolerance ±15%
Auxiliary contacts
Contacts which allow information about the operating state of the circuit-breaker to be routed out-
side the circuit-breaker. The following information is available:
Q open/closed: indication of the position of the circuit-breaker power contacts (Q);
Q trip: signalling circuit-breaker opening due to the current release tripping (owing to overload or
short-circuit), the residual current device, the opening or undervoltage releases, the emergency
opening pushbutton of the motor operator, or owing to use of the test button (SY);
Q trip unit tripping: indicates that one of the protection functions of the electronic or thermomag-
netic trip unit has tripped (S51).
Changeover of auxiliary contacts Q (open/closed), SY (Relay tripped) and S51 (trip unit tripping)
CB Open Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
Normal sequence
CB Closed Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
Trip Sequence CB Open Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
(trip caused by: CB Closed Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
- SOR,
- UVR, CB Trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=06
- Trip Test) CB Resets Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
CB Open Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
Trip Sequence CB Closed Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
(trip caused by trip unit) CB Trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=08
CB Resets Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
Cabled auxiliary Not cabled auxiliary Cabled auxiliary contact for

contact contact withdrawable circuit-breaker
24V DC and 250V AC/DC auxiliary contacts

250V AC/DC and 24VAC/ DC auxiliary contacts are installed without the need for any screws. They
are extremely easy to fit. Simply use slight pressure in the appropriate place. The following versions
of auxiliary contacts are available:
3/19
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Q cabled (AWG20 cable section -0.5mm2):

– for withdrawable circuit-breakers with fixed part and moving part connector;
Q not cabled:
– for fixed/plug-in circuit-breakers with cables from 0.5 up to 1.5 mm2 in section.
Auxiliary contacts are supplied for each circuit-breaker in the SACE XT family in various different
combinations, as shown in the table. The following items can be ordered to make installation even
more flexible:
Q a non-cabled auxiliary contact can create different signals (Q or SY) as the position of the circuit-
breaker it is installed in varies;
Q a non-cabled S51 auxiliary contact, which can be used for XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers;
Q a cabled auxiliary contact, with non numerates cables. Changing the placement in circuit-break-
er, it’s possible to obtain different signals (Q or SY).
Combinations XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

3/4p 3/4p 3/4p 3/4p
1Q 1SY 24V DC F-P F-P-W F-P F-P-W
3Q 1SY 24V DC – F-P-W F-P F-P-W
1S51 24V DC – F-P-W – F-P-W
1Q 1SY 250V AC/DC F-P F-P-W F-P F-P-W
2Q 2SY 1S51 250V AC/DC – F-P-W – F-P-W
3Q 2SY 250V AC/DC – F-P-W – F-P-W
3Q 1SY 250V AC/DC – F-P-W F-P F-P-W
1S51 250V AC/DC – F-P-W – F-P-W
2Q 1SY 250V AC/DC F-P F-P F-P F-P
3Q on the left 250V AC/DC F-P F-P F-P F-P
F = Fixed, P = Plug-in, W = Withdrawable
Auxiliary contacts 24V DC - 250V AC/DC

Circuit-breaker 3p Circuit-breaker 4p
2Q 2Q
1SY 1SY
XT1
3Q left 3Q left
3Q 3Q
1SY 1SY
XT3
3Q left 3Q left
2SY 2SY
2Q 2Q
3Q left 3Q left
XT2
XT4 1S51 1S51
or 1Q or 1Q
3/20
1SDC210033D0201
AUX 250V AC/DC - Electrical specifications
Power supply Voltage Operating current [A]
Class of use
[V] AC DC
DC-12 – 0.5
110 AC/DC
DC-14 – 0.05
AC-12, AC-13, AC-14 6 –
125 AC/DC
AC-15 5 –
AC-12 and DC-12 6 0.3
AC-13 6 –
250 AC/DC
AC-14 and DC-14 5 0.03
AC-15 4 –
AUX 24V DC - Electrical specifications

[V] DC
5 DC 0.01
24 DC 0.1
400V AC auxiliary contacts

400V AC auxiliary contacts are only available for XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers in the following ver-
sions:
Q cabled (AWG17 cable section -1mm2):
– for withdrawable circuit-breakers with fixed part and moving part connector.
The 400 V auxiliary contacts take up the whole right-hand slot of the circuit-breaker.
Cabled auxiliary contact
XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

Combinations
3/4p 3/4p 3/4p 3/4p
1Q 1SY 400V – F-P-W – F-P-W
2Q 400V – F-P-W – F-P-W
Auxiliary contacts 400V AC

Cabled auxiliary contact for Circuit-breaker 3p Circuit-breaker 4p
withdrawable circuit-breaker
AUX AUX
400V 400V
XT2
XT4
AUX 400V AC - Electrical specifications

[V] AC DC
125 AC/DC – 0.5
250 AC/DC 12 0.3
400 AC/DC 3 –
3/21
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Auxiliary position contacts - AUP

These allow information about the position of the circuit-breaker in relation to the fixed part of plug-in
or withdrawable versions to be routed outside the circuit-breaker itself.
Two types of position contact (AUP) are available, at 250V AC/DC and 24V AC/DC:
Q racked-in contact for all plug-in and withdrawable SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers, to be posi-
tioned in the fixed part;
Q racked-out contact for all withdrawable SACE Tmax XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers, to be in-
stalled in the side part of the withdrawable version.
Auxiliary position contact
For further details about the electrical specifications of the contacts, consult the “24V DC and 250V
AC contacts” section of the Accessories chapter.
Circuit-breaker N° racked-in contact N° rcked-out contact

XT1 3/4 poles 4 –
3 poles 2
XT2 2
4 poles 4
XT3 3/4 poles 4 –
XT4 3/4 poles 4 2
Plug-in circuit-breaker with racked in contact
Racked-in signal ON Racked-in signal OFF
Withdrawable circuit-breaker with racked in - racked out contacts
Racked-in signal ON Racked-in signal OFF Racked-in signal OFF

Racked-out signal OFF Racked-out signal OFF Racked-out signal ON
3/22
1SDC210033D0201
Early auxiliary contacts - AUE
Early contacts in relation to closing: allow the undervoltage release to be supplied before the main
contacts close, in accordance with the IEC 60204-1, VDE 0113 Standards.
Early contacts in relation to opening: allow any electronic devices connected to the system that
could be damaged owing to overvoltages generated by the circuit-breaker opening operation to be
disconnected in advance.
The early opening/closing auxiliary contacts can be:
Q installed inside the direct and transmitted rotary handle operating mechanisms for all the SACE
Early auxiliary contacts Tmax XT family circuit-breakers (max two contacts @ 400V):
in the handle – in the cabled version with 1m long cables (AWG20 cable sections);
– a dedicated code is available in the withdrawable version which includes the connector for
the moving part and fixed part;
Q installed in the three-pole and four-pole fixed version SACE Tmax XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers
(max two 250V auxiliary contacts). In the four-pole version the early opening/closing contacts
are inserted in the slot of the third pole. This type of early contact is supplied with a back clamp-
ing to be installed on the left-hand side of the circuit-breaker to facilitate wiring operations
(AWG20 cable diameters). Opening/closing contacts in the circuit-breaker excludes use of the
four-pole RC Sel release.
For further details about the electrical specifications of the contacts, consult the “400V DC and
Early auxiliary contacts inside the 250V AC contacts” section of the Accessories chapter.
circuit-breaker and connector
Motor operators
Devices that allow circuit-breaker opening and closing to be controlled:
Q in the remote mode, by means of electric controls;
Q locally directly from the front, by means of a special mechanisms.
MOD direct action motor operator
Position for key lock (opzional)
Slot for padlock device

Direct action motor
operator (MOD)
Slot for the
operating lever
AUTO-MANUAL selector
Lever case: under the cover

there is the thermomagnetic trip
unit rotary switch for the setting
of thermal protection
Test pushbutton
The direct action motor control available for XT1 and XT3, is supplied:
Q complete with 1m long cables;
Q with flange, to replace the standard one supplied with the circuit-breaker;
Q with padlock device, only removable when the motor is in the open position. The padlock device
accepts up to three 8 mm padlocks;
Q auxiliary contacts (AU-MO) which allow the motor control mode (manual or auto) signal to be
routed outside;
Q (on request) the motor operator can be fitted with a key lock (consult the “locks” section in the
Accessories chapter).
3/23
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Operating principles:
Q a selector on the front of the MOD, is used for selecting the operating mode:
– AUTO: when the selector is in this position, circuit-breaker closing can only take place re-
motely by means of an electric impulse, whereas opening is allowed both remotely and from
the front of the motor;
– MANUAL: when the selector is in this position, the circuit-breaker can only be opened/closed
from the front of the motor by means of the relative lever housed in a slot made in the motor
itself;
Q operation of the motor operator via remote control is also guaranteed by permanent electrical
opening/closing impulses;
Q the resetting modes shown in the diagrams below depend on the reset wiring diagram chosen
by the customer (consult the reset wiring diagrams in the “Electric Diagrams”) chapter.
Operating mode: manual Operating mode: AUTO
I: ON I: ON
trip unit trip unit
intervention intervention
opening closing
move the move the signal in signal in
Trip lever in OFF lever in ON Trip remote remote
move the lever opening operator mode mode
in OFF in remote mode
O: OFF O: OFF
Stored energy motor operators - MOE and MOE-E
Lever to recharge the springs

Optional transparent lock
Signalling of the springs status: of the AUTO-MANUAL
charged springs/discharged springs selector (always supplied)
Stored energy motor AUTO-MANUAL-LOCKED selector

operators (MOE) Signalling of the circuit-breaker
status ON-OFF − MOUNTING
Slot for padlock device
Opening pushbutton Closing pushbutton
The MOE or MOE-E stored energy motor operator available for XT2 and XT4 is supplied:
Q complete with 1m long cables;
Q complete with connector for the fixed part and moving part of withdrawable devices. If the motor
operator is used with fixed or plug-in circuit-breakers, the connector can be easily removed;
Q with flange, to use instead of the standard one supplied with the circuit-breaker;
Q with padlock device, only removable when the motor is in the open position. The padlock device
accepts up to three 8mm padlocks;
Q with lock of the AUTO-MANUAL selector;
Q with auxiliary contacts (AUX-MO) that allow the motor’s control mode (manual or remote) signal
to be routed outside;
3/24
1SDC210033D0201
Q (on request) the motor operator can be equipped with key lock (consult the “locks” section in the
Accessories chapter);
Q (on request) the motor operator can be equipped with lock to safeguard against manual opera-
tion MOL-M (consult the “locks” section in the Accessories chapter).
Operating principles:
Q a selector on the front of the MOE, is used for selecting the operating mode:
– AUTO: when the selector is in this position, the pushbuttons on the front of the motor are
locked. Circuit-breaker closing can only take place remotely by means of an electric impulse,
whereas opening is allowed both remotely and from the front of the motor;
– MANUAL: the circuit-breaker can only be opened/closed from the front of the motor using
the relative pushbuttons;
– LOCKED: when the selector is in this position, the circuit-breaker is in the open position. The
padlock device can be withdrawn and the motor locked in the open position;
Q operation of the motor operator via remote control is also guaranteed by permanent electrical
opening/closing impulses. Once an opening command has been given, the next closing com-
mand (permanent) is taken over by the motor operator once opening has been completed. In
the same way, an opening command is taken over once the previous closing operation has been
completed;
Q the resetting modes shown in the diagrams below depend on the reset wiring diagram chosen
by the customer (consult the reset wiring diagrams in the “Electric Diagrams”) chapter.
If the electronic trip unit Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU with Ekip Com module is used, motor
operator MOE-E can be used instead of motor operator MOE.
MOE-E allows the digital signals from the supervision and monitoring system to be used by means
of the release and Ekip Com contacts and to be converted into power signals for operating the
motor operator. All the features described above for the MOE motor operator are also valid for the
MOE-E version.
Operating mode: manual Operating mode: AUTO
I: ON discharged springs I: ON discharged springs

SOR / UVR / SA SOR / UVR / SA
release tripping release tripping
Press the Press Press the Press
OFF push- the ON OFF push- the ON
O: OFF discharged springs button on pushbutton O: OFF discharged springs button on pushbutton
recharge the motor remotely push OFF the motor remotely
the springs pushbutton
O: OFF charged springs O: OFF charged springs
3/25
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Changeover of auxiliary contacts Q (open/closed), SY (Relay tripped) and S51 (trip unit tripping)
Circuit-breaker with MOE (MANUAL Mode)
By pressing the Red pushbutton, the CB trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=06
Normal sequence
Charging the springs, CB opens Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
By pressing the Green pushbutton, the CB Closes Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
Trip Sequence CB Closed Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
(trip caused by: CB trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=06
- SOR,
- UVR, Charging the springs, CB opens Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
- Trip Test) By pressing the Green pushbutton, the CB Closes Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
Trip Sequence CB trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=08
(trip caused by
trip unit) Charging the springs, CB opens Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
By pressing the Green pushbutton, the CB Closes Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
Circuit-breaker with MOE (AUTO Mode)
By pressing the Opening pushbutton remotely,
Q=12 SY=98 S51=06
Normal sequence the CB opens
By pressing the Closing pushbutton remotely, the
Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
CB Closes
Trip Sequence CB trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=06
(trip caused by:
- SOR, By pressing the Opening pushbutton remotely,
Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
- UVR, the CB opens
- Trip Test) By pressing the Closing pushbutton remotely, the
Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
CB Closes
CB trips Q=12 SY=98 S51=08
Trip Sequence
(trip caused by By pressing the Opening pushbutton remotely,
Q=12 SY=96 S51=06
trip unit) the CB opens
By pressing the Closing pushbutton remotely, the
Q=14 SY=96 S51=06
CB Closes
Electrical specifications MOD MOE and MOE-E

[V] – 24 DC – 24 DC
[V] – 48…60 DC – 48…60 DC
[V] 110…125 AC 110…125 DC 110…125 AC 110…125 DC
Rated voltage, Un
[V] 220…250 AC 220…250 DC 220…250 AC 220…250 DC
[V] 380...440 AC – 380...440 AC –
[V] 480...525 AC – 480...525 AC –
Operating Voltage [% Un] MIN=85% Un; MAX=110% Un
Power absorbed on inrush Ps [VA - W] ≤ 500 ≤ 500 ≤ 300 ≤ 300
Power absorbed in Pc service [VA - W] ≤ 300 ≤ 300 ≤ 150 ≤ 150
Operating frequency [Hz] 50..60 50..60
opening [s] < 0.1 < 1.5
Duration (1) closing [s] < 0.1 < 0.1
reset [s] < 0.1 <3
Mechanical life [N° operations] 25000 25000
Minimum duration of electrical
[ms] ≥ 150 ≥ 150
opening and closing command
(1)
Total time, from transmission of impulse to opening of circuit-breaker
3/26
1SDC210033D0201
Connectors for electrical accessories
Plug-in circuit-breaker
In the plug-in version of SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers, the auxiliary circuits can be disconnected
by means of two different types of adapter:
Q plug and socket adapter to be fixed on the bottom of the panel: for XT1, XT2, XT3, XT4;
Q plug and socket adapter installed on the rear of the circuit-breaker and in the fixed part of plug-in
devices: for XT2, XT4.
Plug and socket adapters on the back of the panel

To make it easier to connect/disconnect auxiliary circuits, wired electrical accessories can be con-
nected to one or more plug and socket connectors to be installed on the back of the panel.
3, 6, 9 and 15 PIN connectors are available. The cables connect/disconnect to and from the con-
nector in a fast and simple way without the aid of any dedicated tools.
Consider the number of cables of each electrical accessory when calculating the number of con-
nectors required.
Plug and socket adapters on
the back of the panel
Accessory Number of cables
SOR, PS-SOR, UVR, External Neutral, PTC 2
SA, 1 AUX 3
Auxiliary power supply 24V DC, AUE, PR212CI 4
MOE-E 5
Ekip Com, Residual current 6
MOE (with AUX-MO), MOD (with AUX-MO) 7
Plug and socket adapters installed on the rear of the circuit-breaker and in the fixed part
Only for the plug-in versions of Tmax XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers, the auxiliary circuits can be
automatically disconnected by means of an adapter installed on the rear of the circuit-breaker and
in the fixed part of plug-in versions.
The 12 PIN connector can only be used with accessories that function at a voltage of not more than
250V AC/DC. The cables are connected to /disconnected from the connector in a fast and simple
way without the aid of any dedicated tools. Wiring is to be carried out by the Customer.
Placked and socket adaptor Plug and socket

placed on the back moving part adaptor in the fixed part
Withdrawable circuit-breaker
When withdrawable circuit-breakers are used, the codes of the electrical accessories specifically
designed for this version must be ordered. These dedicated codes contain the wired electrical ac-
cessory with connector for the moving part and for the fixed part to be inserted in the side of the
fixed part. If the MOE motor operator is ordered, connectors for the fixed part and moving part are
always supplied since there is no dedicated code for the withdrawable version.
The connectors of electrical accessories for withdrawable circuit-breakers must all be installed on
the right side of the circuit-breaker in housings made in the side of the fixed part.
This type of connection allows the auxiliary circuits to be disconnected automatically when the
circuit-breaker is withdrawn from the fixed part.
Cabling of withdrawable version
If the Customer wants to wire the fixed part in advance of the moving part, the fixed part mounting
connectors can be ordered as spare parts.
3/27
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Residual current releases

Both circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors are pre-engineered for assembly combined with
residual current releases.
Residual current circuit-breakers derived from the circuit-breaker are known as “mixed”, meaning
that, besides protection against the typical overloads and short-circuits of circuit-breakers, they also
provide protection for people and against earth fault currents, thus protecting against direct, indirect
contacts and the risk of fires.
Residual current circuit-breakers derived from the switch-disconnector are “pure” residual current
circuit-breakers, i.e. they only provide residual current protection and not the protections typical of
circuit-breakers. “Pures” residual current circuit-breakers are only sensitive to earth fault current and
are generally used as main switches in small panels for distribution to end users.
Use of “pure” and “mixed” residual current circuit-breakers allows the insulation state of the instal-
lation to be continuously monitored. It ensures efficient protection against the risks of fires and
explosions and, in the case that detect fault at IΔn<30mA devices, also protects people against
indirect and direct contacts, thereby integrating the compulsory measures established by the ac-
cident prevention standards and regulations.
The residual current releases comply with the following Standards:
Q IEC 60947-2 annex B;
Q IEC 61000: for protection against unwarranted tripping.
The table gives all the residual current devices which can be used with the Tmax XT family of circuit-
breakers:
XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

3p 4p 3p 4p 3p 4p 3p 4p
RC Inst F F F F
RC Sel XT1-XT3 F F F F
RC Sel 200 F
Rc Sel XT2-XT4 F-P-W F-P-W
RC B type F
All Tmax XT residual current devices:

Q feature microprocessor technology and act directly on the circuit-breaker by means of a dedi-
cated opening solenoid (supplied with the residual current release and also available as a spare
part) which must be housed in the relative slot formed in the third pole are to the left of the op-
erating lever;
Q do not need an auxiliary supply as they are powered directly from the mains;
Q can be supplied either from above or below;
Q functionality is guaranteed even with a single phase plus neutral or just two live phases and in
the presence of pulsating unidirectional currents with direct components (minimum auxiliary volt-
age PHASE-NEUTRAL 85 Vrms);
Q all possible connection combinations are permitted, as long as the neutral connection to the first
pole on the left in the four-pole version is guaranteed.
3/28
1SDC210033D0201
RC Sel 200 residual current releases (type A) XT1
Thanks to its low height, the RC Sel 200 residual current release can be installed in 200mm mod-
ules. Moreover, its special shape reduces the overall size of the installation if two or more units are
to be installed side by side.
Power-on LED
Current setting
Alarm and prealarm
signal LED
Time of non trip setting
Magnetic indicator of
residual current trip Test pushbotton
Disconnection device for

insulation test
RC Inst. residual current releases for XT1 and XT3
Power-on LED
Current setting
Magnetic indicator for

residual current trip
Test pushbutton
Disconnection device
for the insulation test
3/29
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
RC Inst, RC Sel residual current releases (type A) for XT1 and XT3
Power-on LED
Alarm and prealarm Current setting

signal LED
Magnetic indicator of
residual current trip
Test pushbotton
Disconnection device
for insulation test
RC Sel residual current releases (type A) for XT2 and XT4
Current setting
Power-on LED
Alarm and prealarm Test pushbotton

signal LED
Magnetic indicator of Disconnection device for

residual current trip insulation test
3/30
1SDC210033D0201
The fixed version of the RC Sel residual current release can easily be converted:
Q into the plug-in type:
– by ordering the kit for converting the residual current release from the fixed to the plug-in version;
Q into the withdrawable type:
– by ordering the kit for converting the residual current release from the plug-in to the withdraw-
able version. This kit contains the shunt opening release of the withdrawable residual cur-
rent device to replace the shunt opening release supplied with the fixed version. The shunt
opening release of the withdrawable residual current device contains both the connector for
the moving part and the connector for the fixed part. The 160A frame with residual current
withdrawable breaker can be used up to a maximum current of 135A, whereas the 250A
frame can be used up to 210A.
With the RC Sel residual current release for XT2-XT4, it is possible to use the same terminals us-
able for the fixed circuit-breaker and for the fixed parts of plug-in and withdrawable circuit-breakers.
RC B Type residual current release (type B) for XT3
Current setting
Power-on LED
LED signalling alarm Test pushbutton

and pre-alarm
Magnetic indicator of Setting fault frequencies

residual current device trip
Setting non-tripping times
The RC B Type residual current release, to be used in conjunction with the XT3 circuit-breaker, has
the following features:
Q it complies with type B operation, which guarantees sensitivity to residual fault currents with
alternating, pulsating alternating and direct current components (IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2
Annex B, IEC 60755);
Q the maximum frequency band of the residual fault current can be selected (3 steps: 400 -
700 - 1000Hz). The residual current device can therefore be adapted to suit various industrial
installation requirements according to the prospective fault frequencies generated on the load
side of the release. Typical installations that may require different frequency thresholds from the
standard ones (50 - 60Hz) are welding systems for the automobile industry (1000Hz), the textile
industry (700Hz), airports and three-phase drives (400Hz).
3/31
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Electrical characteristic RC Sel 200mm RC Inst RC Sel RC Sel RC B Type
XT1 XT1-XT3 XT1-XT3 XT2-XT4 XT3
Primary power supply Voltage [V] 85…500 85…500 85…500 85…690 110…500
Operating frequency [Hz] 45…66 45…66 45…66 45…66 45…66
Fault frequency [Hz] 50-60 50-60 50-60 50-60 400-700-1000
Test operating range [V] 85…500 85…500 85…500 85…690 110…500
XT1 up to 160 up to 160 XT1 up to 160 XT2(2)
Rated operating current [A] up to 160 up to 225
XT3 up to 250 up to 250 XT3 up to 250 XT4 (2)
0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3 0.03-0.1-0.3 0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3 0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3 0.03-0.05-0.1
Adjustable trip thresholds [A]
0.5-1-3-5-10 0.5-1-3 0.5-1-3-5-10 0.5-1-3-5-10 0.3-0.5-1
Selective type S Q – Q Q Q
instantaneous instantaneous instantaneous instantaneous
Adjustable NON-trip time settings [s]
0.1-0.2-0.3- instantaneous 0.1-0.2-0.3- 0.1-0.2-0.3- 0-0.1-0.2-0.3-
at 2xIΔn
0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3
Power input <10 W at 500V AC <8 W at 500V AC <10 W at 500V AC <5 W at 500V AC <10 W at 500V AC
Trip Coil with switch contact for trip signal Q Q Q Q Q
Input for remote controlled opening command Q – Q Q Q
NO contact for pre-alarm signal Q – Q Q Q
NO contact for alarm signal Q – Q Q Q
Prealarm indication from 25% IΔn.
Q – Q Q Q
Steady yellow Led light
Alarm timing indication at 75% IΔn.
Q – Q Q Q
Flashing yellow Led light(1)
Type A for pulsating alternating current,
Q Q Q Q Q
Type AC for alternating current
Type B for pulsating current and direct current – – – – Q
(1)
indication of alarm timing at 90% IΔn for 30mA
(2)
withdrawable version: the 160 frame can be used with a max In = 135A
the 250 frame can be used with a max In = 210A
SACE RCQ020/A panel type residual current release (type A)

Tmax circuit-breakers can also be used in conjunction with RCQ020 panel type residual current
relays with separate toroid to be installed on the line conductors ("/A" letter show the necessity to
have on auxiliary power supply).
Thanks to its wide range of settings, the panel relay is suitable for:
Q applications where the installation conditions are particularly restrictive, such as circuit-breakers
already installed or limited space in the circuit-breaker compartment;
Toroid Q creating a residual current protection system coordinated at various distribution levels, from the
main switchboard to the end user;
Q where residual current protection with low sensitivity is required, e.g. in partial (current) or total
(time) selective chains;
Q highly sensitive applications (physiological sensitivity) for protecting people against direct con-
tacts.
Thanks to the 115-230...415V external auxiliary power supply, the RCQ020 panel-type residual cur-
rent device is able to detect current leakage from 30mA to 30A and to act with a trip time that can be
adjusted from instantaneous to delayed by 5s. The opening mechanism is the indirect action type
and acts on the circuit-breaker release mechanism by means of the shunt opening or undervoltage
release of the circuit-breaker itself.
The opening command to the circuit-breaker (Trip delay) can be temporarily inhibited, and the cir-
cuit-breaker can be opened by remote control by means of the RCQ020 device.
The following equipment must be requested when ordering:
Q the RCQ020 device;
Q an opening coil (SOR) or an undervoltage release (UVR) of the circuit-breaker to be housed in the
relative slot made in the left pole of the circuit-breaker itself;
Q a closed toroid, that can be used for cables and busbars, chosen from amongst those available,
with a diameter from 60mm to 185mm.
3/32
1SDC210033D0201
Signals available:
Q LED to indicate the status of the residual current device (supplied or not supplied). RCQ02 is
equipped with the positive safety function thanks to which the RCQ020 commands automatic
circuit-breaker opening in the absence of auxiliary voltage;
Q LED for signalling faults;
Q LED for signalling tripping of the residual current device;
Q pre-alarm/alarm/trip electrical signals.
LED signalling the

status of the residual
Protection threshold current device
from 50mA at 50A
Trip time adjustable Dip-switch to set the

from istantaneous to 5s signalling status
Test pushbutton Reset pushbutton
RCQ020/A residual current release

Power supply Voltage AC [V] 115-230...415
Operating frequency [Hz] 45÷66Hz
@115V AC 500mA for 50ms
Inrush current @230V AC 150mA for 50ms
@415V AC 100mA for 50ms
Power input at full rate 2 [VA] / 2 [W]
Trip threshold adjustment IΔn [A] 0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3-0.5-1-3-5-10-30
Trip time adjustment [s] instantaneous 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.5-0.7-1-2-3-5
Pre-alarm threshold x IΔn 25%
A type for pulsing alternate current Q
Signals
Device powered visual signalling Q
Visual signalling of device not functioning/ not
Q
configured
Visual signalling of residual current protection Q
Electrical alarm/pre-alarm signal Q
Electric trip signal Q
Controls
Remotely controlled opening command Q
Remotely controlled reset command Q
Operating range of closed transformers
In max = 250A
Ø 60 [mm] toroidal transformer [A]
Use 0.03..30A
In max = 400A
Use 0.03..30A
In max = 800A
Use 0.1..30A
By means of 4 shielded or twisted
Connection to toroidal transformer
conductors. Maximum tolerated length: 15m
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 96 x 96 x 77
Drilling for assembly on door [mm] 92 x 92
Standard IEC 60947-2 annex M
3/33
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Ekip Display Ekip LED Meter SACE PR212/CI External neutral
Distribution protection
Ekip LS/I – – – –
Ekip I – – – –
Ekip LSI Q Q – Q
Ekip LSIG Q Q – Q
Motor protection
Ekip M-I – – – –
Ekip M-LIU – – – –
Ekip M-LRIU Q Q Q –
Ekip G-LS/I – – – –
Oversized Neutral Protection
Ekip N-LS/I – – – –
Ekip Display
The Ekip Display is a unit which can be applied on the front of the solid-state trip unit and shows the
current values, alarms and protection and communication parameter programming.
Display
Power-on LED
Fixing Device
Slot for lead seal

Ekip TT or Ekip T&P
connector Display Push-botton
Main features:
Q installation: Ekip Display can easily be installed on the front of the Ekip LSI, Ekip LISIG and
Ekip M-LRIU electronic trip units. It is connected by means of the test connector on the front
of the trip unit, and fixing is simple and reliable thanks to a specially designed mechanism. This
mechanism also provides a practical way of fastening the accessories to the circuit-breaker in
order to prevent undesired access to the dip-switches. Installation can be carried out under any
conditions, even with the door closed and the electronic trip unit already on and functioning;
Q functions: Ekip Display has four buttons for browsing through the menus. It functions in the
self-supply mode starting from a current of I>0.2xIn circulating through at least one phase.
Backlighting is activated in the presence of higher loads, thereby allowing a better leggibility of
visualized informations. The rear lighting comes on in self-supply for a current I>0.4xIn and is
always on when there is electronic trip unit auxiliary power supply.
Ekip Display:
– shows the current values;
– shows the settings of the protection functions in Amperes or in In;
– shows the protection that caused the release to trip and the fault current (only when there is
24V external voltage or the Ekip TT unit);
– allows the trip thresholds of the trip unit to be programmed and the communication param-
eters to be set on bus system;
Q compatibility: Ekip Display can be fitted even when front accessories, such as the motor, direct
and transmitted rotary handles etc. are already installed. It's possible to use Ekip TT or Ekip T&P
without removing Ekip Display.
3/34
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip LED Meter
The Ekip LED Meter can be applied to the front of the electronic trip unit and displays the current
values and alarms.
L, S, I, G protection LED
Power-on LED
Ekip TT or Ekip T&P Fixing Device

connector
Slot for lead seal

LED signalling the % of
current for each phase Timing LED
Main features:
Q installation: Ekip LED Meter can be easily installed on the front of Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG and
Ekip M-LRIU electronic trip units. It is connected by means of the test connector on the front
of the release and fixing is simple and reliable thanks to a specially designed mechanism. This
mechanism also provides a practical way of fastening the accessories to the circuit-breaker in
order to prevent undesired access to the dip-switches. Installation can be carried out under any
conditions, even with the door closed and the electronic trip unit already on and functioning;
Q functions: Ekip LED Meter provides an accurate indication about the value of the current cir-
culating in the trip unit. It does this by means of a scale of LED. Their different colours allow the
normal operation, prealarm and alarm states of the circuit-breaker to be recognized at a glance.
It functions in self-supply mode from a current of I>0.2xIn circulating through at least one phase
or when electronic trip unit’s auxiliary power is available;
Q compatibility: the Ekip LED Meter can also be fitted when front accessories, such as the
motor, direct and transmitted rotary handles. It's possible to use Ekip TT or Ekip T&P without
removing Ekip LED Meter.
SACE PR212/CI contactor operator

PR212/CI is an interface device that allow Ekip M-LRIU to comand the contactor. The stand-by
position normally corresponds to the opening position of the main contacts. PR212/CI can be used
in conjunction with XT2-XT4 circuit-breakers equipped with the electronic trip unit for Ekip M-LRIU
motor protection.
Main features:
Q installation: PR212/CI can be installed both on a DIN rail and on the back of the door. It is con-
nected to the electronic trip unit with a dedicated connector, which has to be ordered in relation
to the circuit-breaker version;
Q functions: when the release is set to “Normal Mode” the contactor can be opened if a fault oc-
curs due to overload L, locked rotor R or phase failure/unbalance U.
3/35
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Current sensor for external neutral

The current sensor for external neutral is applied to the uninterrupted neutral conductor. It allows the
reading of the neutral current for all the protection functions.
Main features:
Q installation: the external neutral current sensor is available for XT2 and XT4 three-pole circuit-
breakers in the fixed/plug-in and withdrawable version equipped with Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG elec-
tronic trip unit. The sensor must be connected to the release with the specific connector, which
must be ordered separately.
Connection accessories
Devices which allow the electronic trip unit to be connected to external plant units or components.
The connectors are available for the circuit-breakers in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable version.
Name of connector Trip Units

External neutral connector Ekip LSIG
Connector for PR212/CI Ekip M-LRIU
Connector for 24V DC auxiliary power supply Ekip LSI - Ekip LSIG - Ekip M-LRIU
Connector for PTC Ekip M-LRIU
The connector for the auxiliary power supply is inserted inside the right-hand slot of the circuit-
breaker, and occupies the space of two due auxiliary contacts. To check compatibility with the
auxiliary contacts, consult the compatibility tables in the Accessories chapter.
Connector for 24V
3/36
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
HMI030 interface on the front of the switchboard

HMI030 is an interface on the front of the switchboard only usable with protection trip units fitted
with Ekip Com.
LED signaling the % of current for each phase
Alarm LED
Display
Display push-botton
Main features:
Q installation: HMI030 can be fitted into the hole in the door using the automatic click-in method.
In situations where mechanical stress is particularly intense, it can also be installed by using the
special clips supplied. It must be connected directly to the Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU
protection trip unit with Ekip Com via the serial communication line. HMI030 requires a 24V DC
power supply;
Q functions: HMI030 consists of a graphic display and 4 buttons for browsing through the men-
us. This accessory allows you to view:
– the measurements taken by the release to which it is connected;
– the alarms/events of the release.
Thanks to its high level of accuracy, the same as that of the trip unit protection, the device is a
valid substitute for conventional instruments without any additional current transformers.
3/37
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Ekip Com
Ekip Com allows the MOE-E motor operator to be controlled, to determine the ON/OFF/TRIP state
of the circuit-breaker and to connect the electronic trip unit to a Modbus communication line.
Ekip Com is available in two versions: one version for the circuit-breakers in the fixed/plug-in version
and a version complete with connector for the fixed part and the moving part for circuit-breakers in
the withdrawable version.
Q installation: the Ekip Com module is inserted in the special seat made in the right-hand pole of
the circuit-breaker and fixing is carried out automatically without any need for screws or tools.
Connection to the trip unit is made using the special small cable which, for greater practicality
and safety, is fitted with a cable guide. The connection towards the Modbus line is made by
means of the terminal box to which a 24V DC auxiliary power supply must also be connected,
which activates both the module and the protection trip unit;
Q functions: the Ekip Com module offers the possibility of acquiring the state of the circuit-
breaker remotely and, in combination with the MOE-E motor operator, allows it to be opened
and closed. If combined with a trip unit fitted with communication (Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip
M-LRIU), the Ekip Com module allows the trip unit to be connected to a Modbus network,
offering the possibility of programming the protections and acquiring the measurements and
alarms when it is connected to a control and/or supervision system. When it is connected to the
HMI030 unit, it is possible to have these data locally on the front of the switchboard.
For further details on the comunication systems which can be made by means of the Ekip Com
module, refer to the “Communication Systems” paragraph in the “Ranges” chapter.
Ekip Com
Circuit-breaker 3p Circuit-breaker 4p
Ekip Ekip
Com Com
XT2
XT4
EP010 - FBP
The EP010 Fieldbus interface allows SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers to be integrated into commu-
nication systems to control and supervise using the most diffused communication protocols, such
as Profibus, DeviceNet and CANopen (besides ModBus RTU, supported by Ekip Com).
To realize this, EP010 is interfaced on one side by an intelligent connector from ABB Field Bus Plug
family’s, to allow the choosing of desired protocol.
This is achieved by using ABB FBP FieldBusPlug smart connectors, which allow communication to
be activated with various different protocols.
Main features:
Q installation: the EP010 interface allows XT2 and XT4 circuit-breakers fitted with the Ekip LSI,
Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU electronic trip unit to be connected to the Fieldbus Plug system.
Connections between EP010 and the electronic trip unit are made by means of the Ekip Com
accessory, whereas connections between EP010 and the network are to be carried out by the
Customer and depend on the Field bus plug system used. The PDP22 connector is advisable if
the Profibus protocol is used, or the DNP21 connector in the case of the Device Net protocol.
3/38
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Ekip Connect
Installation and diagnosis software for ABB SACE products with Modbus RTU communication. The
software can be used during the commissioning stage, or for troubleshooting in an up and running
communication network.
Ekip Connect automatically scans the RS-485 bus, detects all the devices connected and checks
their configuration, checking all the possible address, parity and baud rate combinations. A simple
click over SCAN will highlight:
Q devices that fail to respond;
Q configuration errors;
Q incorrect addresses and parity;
Q any wiring errors (with the SACE electronic trip unit);
thus achieving a complete diagnosis of the communication network.
Thanks to this friendly program, the Modbus communication network installation is very easy. Ekip
T&P SW is distributed free of charge and can be downloaded from the BOL web site (http://bol.
it.abb.com).
3/39
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Test and configuration accessories
TESTING and CONFIGURING accessories

Ekip T&P Ekip TT
Ekip LS/I Q Q
Ekip I Q Q
Ekip LSI Q Q
Ekip LSIG Q Q
Motor protection
Ekip M-I Q Q
Ekip M-LIU Q Q
Ekip M-LRIU Q Q
Ekip G LS/I Q Q
Ekip N-LS/I Q Q
Ekip T&P
Ekip T&P is a kit purpose studied to supervise, configure and testing electronic protection trip units.
Ekip T&P
Ekip T&P unit Ekip T&P unit
The kit is composed by:

Q Ekip T&P unit;
Q Ekip TT unit;
Q Adaptors for Emax and Tmax trip units;
Q USB cable for connecting the Ekip T&P unit to the electronic trip unit;
Q CD for installing Ekip Connect and the Ekip T&P driver.
The Ekip T&P unit is connected on one side to the USB port of its own PC and on the other, by
means of a cable provided, to the protection trip unit of the SACE Tmax XT series.
The Ekip T&P unit allows automatic, manual test and the trip test of the device it is connected to.
These functions are managed by means of the Ekip T&P Interface which can only be activated di-
rectly by the Ekip Connect when the Ekip T&P is present and connected to the PC.
3/40
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip TT
LED
- green: in operation
- flashing green: trip test
- red: battery flat
Trip test pushbutton Dipswitch ON-OFF
The Ekip TT accessory is supplied with a special connector which makes connection between the
electronic trip unit and the Ekip TT unit easier. The kit also include san adaptor which allows use of
the Ekip TT unit with the current Tmax breakers.
Ekip TT is a device which allows:
Q verify the correct functioning of the electronic trip unit’s opening solenoid and the trip mecha-
nism of circuit-breaker (trip test);
Q testing of the LEDs on the electronic trip unit it is connected to;
Q (in case of intervention by electronic trip unit) to supply the trip unit powered by auxiliary power
to show the latest intervened protection. Simply linking Ekip TT to the electronic trip unit (or to
the Ekip display or to the Ekip LED Meter), the LED light on the latest protection intervened.
Its reduced dimension make it pocket size.
Ekip T&P functions Ekip TT functions

Trip Protection Parameter Protection Communication Thermal Trip test LED test Latest trip
Test function reading parameter parameter memory detection
test programming programming enabling/
disabling
Ekip LS/I Q Q Q – – Q Q Q Q
Ekip I Q Q Q – – – Q Q Q
Ekip LSI Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Ekip LSIG Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Motor Protection
Ekip M-I – – – – – – Q Q Q
Ekip M-LIU Q Q Q – – – Q Q Q
Ekip M-LRIU Q Q Q Q Q – Q Q Q
Ekip G-LS/I Q Q Q – – Q Q Q Q
Ekip N-LS/I Q Q Q – – Q Q Q Q
3/41
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Automatic network-generator transfer unit ATS021-ATS022
The ATS (Automatic Transfer Switch) is the network-generator transfer unit used in installations
where switching the main power line to an emergency one is required, to ensure power supply to
the loads in the case of anomalies in the main line.
The unit is able to manage the entire transfer procedure automatically, and prepares the commands
for carrying out the procedure manually as well.
In the case of an anomaly in the main line voltage, in accordance with the parameters set by the
user, the opening of the circuit-breaker of the main line, the starting of the generator set (when pro-
vided) and the closing of the emergency line are performed. In the same way, in the case of the main
ATS021 line returning, the procedure of reverse transfer is controlled automatically.
The new generation of ATS (ATS021 and ATS022) offers the most advanced and complete solu-
tions to guarantee service continuity. The ATS021 and ATS022 can be used both with all the circuit-
breakers in the SACE Tmax XT family and with the switch-disconnectors.
The ATS021 and ATS022 devices have been designed to operate with self-supply. The ATS022
unit also prepares the connection for auxiliary power supply, which allows additional functions to
be used.
The ATS021 and ATS022 devices carry out control of both the power supply lines and analyse:
Q phase unbalance;
Q frequency unbalance;
Q phase loss.
Apart from the standard control functions, with the ATS022 unit, the following is possible:
Q selecting the priority line;
Q controlling a third circuit-breaker;
ATS022 Q incorporating the device in a supervision system with Modbus communication (auxiliary power
supply is needed);
Q reading and setting the parameters, and displaying the measurements and alarms, by means of
a graphic display.
Typical applications for use are: power supply to UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) units, operating
rooms and primary hospital services, emergency power supply for civil buildings, airports, hotels,
data banks and telecommunication systems, power supply of industrial lines for continuous proc-
esses.
For correct configuration, each circuit-breaker connected to the ATS021 or ATS022 must be fitted
with the following accessories:
Q mechanical interlock;
Q motorised control of opening and closing;
Q key lock against just manual operation for the motor operator;
Q contact for signalling the state (open/closed) and contact for tripped;
Q contact for racked-in (in the case of a withdrawable version circuit-breaker).
3/42
1SDC210033D0201
ATS021 ATS022
General
Not Required
Auxiliary Power Supply Not Required (24-110 Vdc is required only for Modbus
dialogue and 16 2/3 Hz system)
Rated Voltage, Un [VAC] Max 480 Max 480
Frequency [Hz] 50, 60 16 2/3, 50, 60, 400
Dimensions (HxLxD) [mm] 96x144x170 96x144x170
Door mounting Door mounting
Type of installation
DIN-rail mounting DIN-rail mounting
Operating Mode Auto/Manual Auto/Manual
Features
Monitoring of the Normal and Emergency lines Q Q
Controlling CBs of the Normal and Emergency lines Q Q
Generator set startup Q Q
Generator set shutdown with adjustable delay Q Q
Bus-tie – Q
No-priority Line – Q
Modbus RS485 – Q
Display – Q
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature -20…+60 °C -20…+60 °C
Humidity 5% - 90% without condensation 5% - 90% without condensation
Operating thresholds
Minimum voltage -30%…-5%Un -30%…-5%Un
Maximum voltage +5%…+30%Un +5%…+30%Un
Fixed frequency thresholds -10%…+10%fn -10%…+10%fn
Test
Test Mode Q Q
Compliance with standards
Electronic equipment for use in power installations EN-IEC 50178 EN-IEC 50178
EN 50081-2 EN 50081-2
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 50082-2 EN 50082-2
IEC 68-2-1 IEC 68-2-1
Environmental conditions IEC 68-2-2 IEC 68-2-2
IEC 68-2-3 IEC 68-2-3
3/43
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Compatibility of accessories
Check whether the different devices are compatible/incompatible with each other when ordering
accessories. The following table allow provides a simple check of the compatibility between:
Q mechanical accessories, accessories for electronic trip units, motors and residual current devices;
Q internal electrical accessories.
3p
To understand the abbreviations used to identify the accessories more easily, refer to the “Symbols”
paragraph in chapter 8, “Glossary”.
Example of reading the compatibility tables
Fixed/plug-in circuit-breaker compatibility XT1-XT3

SOR UVR PS-SOR 3Q SA SOR UVR .....
3p 3p 3p 3p 3p 4p 4p
Three-pole circuit-breaker
SOR 3p
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UVR 3p
3p PS-SOR 3p
4p
3Q sx 3p
SA 3p
SOR 4p
UVR 4p
.....
The UVR positioned in the slot of the 3rd pole(1) is:

– incompatible with the SOR positioned in the 3rd pole(2);
– incompatible with the UVR positioned in the 3rd pole(3);
– incompatible with the PS-SOR positioned in the 3rd pole(4);
Four-pole circuit-breaker
– incompatible with the 3Q contacts on the left in the 3rd pole(5);
– incompatible with the SA of the residual current device(6);
– compatible with the SOR positioned in the slot of the 4th pole(7);
– compatible with the UVR positioned in the slot of the 4th pole(8);
– ....
Compatibility of mechanical accessories

RHD RHE RHS FLD PLL KLC KLC KLC KLC MOD/ Ekip Ekip SOR/
on on on on on MOE/ Display LED PS-SOR/
CB CB RHX FLD motor MOE-E Meter UVR/SA/
3Q sx 3p
RHD
RHE
RHS
FLD
PLL on CB
KLC on CB
KLC on RHX
KLC on FLD
KLC on motor
MOD/MOE/MOE-E
Ekip Display
Ekip LED Meter
SOR/PS-SOR/UVR/SA/3Q sx 3p
Compatibility
3/44
1SDC210033D0201
Compatibility of electrical accessories
SOR UVR PS-SOR 3Q sx SA SOR UVR PS-SOR 3Q sx 1Q 2Q 3Q KLC on
3p 3p 3p 3p 3p 4p 4p 4p 4p 1SY 1SY 1SY CB
SOR 3p
UVR 3p
PS-SOR 3p
3Q sx 3p
SA 3p
SOR 4p
UVR 4p
PS-SOR 4p
3Q sx 4p
1Q 1SY
2Q 1SY
3Q 1SY
KLC on CB
Compatibility
Compatibility of electrical accessories

SOR UVR PS- 3Q SA AUE SOR UVR PS- 3Q S51 1Q 2Q 3Q 3Q 2Q 400V 400V 24V Ekip KLC
3p 3p SOR sx inter- 4p 4p SOR sx 1SY 1SY SY 2SY 2SY 2Q 1Q Com on
3p 3p nal 3p 4p 4p 1S51 1SY CB
SOR 3p
UVR 3p
PS-SOR 3p
3Q sx 3p
SA
AUE internal 3p
SOR 4p
UVR 4p
PS-SOR 4p
3Q sx 4p
S51
1Q 1SY
2Q 1SY
3Q 1SY
3Q 2SY
2Q 2SY 1S51
400V 2Q
400V 1Q 1SY
24V
Ekip Com
KLC on CB
Compatibility
3/45
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Compatibility of accessories
Withdrawable circuit-breaker compatibility XT2-XT4

S51 1Q 3Q 3Q 2Q 400V 400V Ekip 24V PR NE PTC MOE MOE AUX- AUE SOR UVR PS- SA SOR UVR PS-
1SY 1SY 2SY 2SY 2Q 1Q Com 212CI -E MOE 3p 3p SOR 4p 4p SOR
S51 1SY 3p 4p
S51
1Q 1SY
3Q 1SY
3Q 2SY
2Q 2SY S51
400V 2Q
400V 1Q 1SY
Ekip Com
24V
PR212CI
NE
PTC
MOE (1)
MOE-E (1)
AUX-MOE
AUE
SOR 3p
UVR 3p
PS-SOR 3p
SA
SOR 4p
UVR 4p
PS-SOR 4p
Compatibility
(1)
AUX-MOE always supplied with MOE and MOE-E
3/46
1SDC210033D0201
Characteristic Curves and
Technical Information*
Index
Characteristic Curves
Examples of Curve reading .....................................................................................................4/2
Trip curves with thermomagnetic trip unit
Trip curves for distribution .......................................................................................................4/3
Trip curves for motor protection ..............................................................................................4/5
Trip curves for generator protection ........................................................................................4/6
Trip curves with electronic trip unit
Trip curves for distribution .......................................................................................................4/7
Trip curves for motor protection ............................................................................................4/10
Trip curves for generator protection ......................................................................................4/13
Trip curves for oversized neutral protection ..........................................................................4/14
Specific let-through energy curves
240V ......................................................................................................................................4/15
415-440V ...............................................................................................................................4/16
500V ......................................................................................................................................4/17
690V ......................................................................................................................................4/18
Limiting curves
240V ......................................................................................................................................4/19
415-440V ...............................................................................................................................4/20
500V ......................................................................................................................................4/21
690V ......................................................................................................................................4/22
Technical Information
* All the curves contained in this chapter are Temperature performances ...............................................................................................4/23
preliminary; for more information contact
ABB SACE Dissipated powers ..............................................................................................................4/27
4/1
1SDC210033D0201
Examples of Curve reading
t [s]
Example 1 – XT3N 250 104
Trip curves for distribution

(thermomagnetic trip unit) 103
Let us consider an XT3N 250 TMD In=250 A circuit-breaker.

102 107.9 s
According to the conditions the overload is found in, i.e. with the
circuit-breaker at thermal regime or not, tripping of the thermal 31.5 s
protection varies considerably.
10
For example, for an overload current 3xI1, the trip time is between 7.0 s
107.9 s and 31.5 s for cold tripping and between 31.5 s and 7.0 s
for hot tripping. 1
For fault current values higher than 2500 A the circuit-breakers trips
with the instantaneous magnetic protection I3. 3 x I1
10-1
10-2
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
I2t [106 A2s]

Example 2 – XT2N 160 10

The following figure shows an example of the graph of the specific
let-through energy of the XT2N 160 In=160A circuit-breaker at a
1
voltage of 220/230 V. 160 A
The prospective symmetrical short-circuit current is indicated on

the abscissas, whereas the values of the specific let-through energy
expressed in A2s are shown on the ordinates.
The circuit-breaker lets through a value of I2t equal to 0.76 · 10^6 ·
20 kA
A2 s in correspondence with a short-circuit current of 20 kA. 10-1
10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
Ip [kA]
Example 3 – XT2N 160 10 3
Limitation curves
The figure below gives the trend of the Limitation curves of the
XT2N 160 In=160 A circuit-breaker. A curve
The effective value of the prospective symmetrical short-circuit cur- 10 2
rent is given on the abscissas of the diagram, whereas the peak value 50 kA
of the short-circuit current is indicated on the ordinates.
The limiting effect can be evaluated by comparing the peak value 36.5 kA 160 A
corresponding to the prospective short-circuit current (curve A) with
the peak limited value (curve B), at the same value of symmetrical B curve
10
13.5 kA
short-circuit current.
For a fault current of 20 kA, the XT2N 160 circuit-breaker with a
thermomagnetic trip unit In =160 A limits the peak prospective
short-circuit current to 13.5 kA at a voltage of 500 V, with a reduc-
tion in relation to the peak value of the prospective short-circuit
current of 36.5 kA. 1
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/2
1SDC210033D0201
XT1 160 TMD In=16...63A XT1 160 TMD In=80...160A
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21017EF0001
1SDC21018EF0001
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
10-1 In=16A I3=450A 10-1

In=20A I3=450A
In=25A I3=450A I3=10xIn
I n=32A I3=450A
In=40A I3=450A
In=50-63A I3=10xIn
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
XT2 160 TMA In=1.6...160A XT3 250 TMD In=63...250A
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21019EF0001
104 104 1SDC21020EF0001
103 103
102 102
10 10
In=1.6...12.5 A
In=16...25 A
1 1
In=63...160 A
I3=40 A I3=10xIn
10-1 10-1
In=50 A
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
4/3
1SDC210033D0201
XT4 250 TMA In=16...250A
t [s]
1SDC21021EF0001
104
103
102
10
I3=5...10xIn
10-1
10-2
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
4/4
1SDC210033D0201
Trip curves for motor protection
XT2 100 MF/MA In=1...100A XT3 250 MA In=100...250A
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21022EF0001
1SDC21023EF0001
104 104
103 103
102 102 Load limit
Overload limit
10 10
1 I3=14xIn 1
(In=1...12.5A)
I3=6...14xIn
I3=6...12xIn
(In=20...100A)
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
XT4 200 MA In=10...200A
t [s]
1SDC21024EF0001
104
103
102
Overload limit
10
I3=5...10xIn
10-1
10-2
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
4/5
1SDC210033D0201
Trip curves for generator protection
XT2 160 TMG In=16...160A XT3 250 TMG In=63...250A
t [s] t [s]
1SDC210125EF0001
1SDC21026EF0001
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
In=63...160A In=125...250A
In=50A In=100A
In=32-40A In=80A
In=25A In=63A
10-1 In=20A 10-1
In=16A
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
4/6
1SDC210033D0201
XT2 Ekip LS/I XT2 Ekip LS/I

L-I functions L-S functions
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21027EF0001
1SDC21028EF0001
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1 10
103 103
1...10 1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
x In I [kA] x In I [kA]
XT2 Ekip I XT2 Ekip LSI

I function LSI functions
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21029EF0001
1SDC21030EF0001
104 104
0.4...1
0.4 1
1 10
103 103
1...10
102 102
10
1 10
10 10
I2t ON
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
I2t OFF
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
4/7
1SDC210033D0201
XT2 Ekip LSIG XT2 Ekip LSIG

LSI functions G function
t [s] t [s]
104 104
1SDC21031EF0001
1SDC21032EF0001
0.4...1
0.4 1 0.2...1
0.2 1
103 103
102 102
10
1 10
10 10
I2t ON
102 102
1 1
I4=0.2...0.49 in inibition at 4 In
I4=0.79...1 in inibition at 8 In
10-1 10-1
I2t OFF
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
XT4 Ekip LS/I XT4 Ekip LS/I

t [s] t [s]
104 104
1SDC21033EF0001
1SDC21034EF0001
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
103 103
1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
4/8
1SDC210033D0201
XT4 Ekip I XT4 Ekip LSI
I function LSI functions
t [s] t [s]
104 104
1SDC21035EF0001
1SDC21036EF0001
0.4...1
0.4 1
1 10
103 103
Overload limit
1
102 102
10
1 10
10 10
I2t ON
102 102
1 1
I2t OFF
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
XT4 Ekip LSIG XT4 Ekip LSIG

LSI functions G function
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21086EF0001
1SDC21037EF0001
104 104
0.4...1
0.4 1 0.2...1
0.2 1
103 103
1...10
102 102
10
1 10
10 10
I2t ON
102 102
1 1
I2t OFF I4=0.2...0.49 in inibition at 4 In

I4=0.79...1 in inibition at 8 In
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
4/9
1SDC210033D0201
XT2-XT4 Ekip M-I XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LIU

I function L function
(hot and cold trip)
t [s]
t [s]
1SDC21015FF0001
104
1SDC210E33F0001
105
KRW
104 FROG
103
6 13
103
102
102
10
10A
10
30
1
20
10
30
10A
1 20
10-1 10
10A
10-1
10-2
10-1 1 10 10 2 1,05
10-1 1 10 102
x In x In
XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LIU XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LIU

L function I function
(hot trip with 1 or 2 phases supplied)
t [s]
t [s]
105
1SDC21039EF0001
104
1SDC210E34F0001
KRW
104
103
6 13
103
102
102
10
10A
10
1
30
1 20
10
10-1
10A
10-1
1,05 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 2
x In x In
4/10
1SDC210033D0201
XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LIU XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LRIU
U function L function
(hot and cold trip)
t [s]
1SDC21040EF0001
t [s]
104 105
1SDC210E33F0001
KRW
104
FROG
103
103
102
102
10
10A
10
30
1
20
10
30
10A
1 20
10-1 10
10A
10-1
10-2
10-1 1 10 10 2 1,05
10-1 1 10 102
x In x In
XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LRIU XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LRIU

L function I function
(hot trip with 1 or 2 phases supplied)
t [s]
t [s]
1SDC210E34F0001
105 104 1SDC21041EF0001
KRW
104 103
6 13
103
102
102
10
10A
10
1
30
1 20
10 10-1
10A
10-1
1,05
10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 2
x In x In
4/11
1SDC210033D0201
XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LRIU XT2-XT4 Ekip M-LRIU

U function R function
t [s] t [s]
1SDC21043EF0001
104
1SDC21042EF0001
104
103 103
3...9 R
3 9
102 102
10 10
4...1
1 1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 10 2 10-1 1 10 10 2
x In x In
4/12
1SDC210033D0201
Trip curves for generator protection
XT2 Ekip G-LS/I XT2 Ekip G-LS/I

t [s] t [s]
1SDC21049EF0001
1SDC21050EF0001
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1 10
103 103
1...10 1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
XT4 Ekip G-LS/I XT4 Ekip G-LS/I

t [s] t [s]
1SDC21051EF0001
1SDC21052EF0001
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1 10
103 103
1...10 1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
4/13
1SDC210033D0201
Trip curves for oversized neutral protection
XT2 Ekip N-LS/I XT2 Ekip N-LS/I

t [s] t [s]
104 104
1SDC21053EF0001
1SDC21054EF0001
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
103 103
1...10 1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
XT4 Ekip N-LS/I XT4 Ekip N-LS/I

t [s] t [s]
104 104
1SDC21055EF0001
1SDC21056EF0001
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
103 103
1...10 1...10
102 102
10
10 10
1
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
4/14
1SDC210033D0201
240V
XT1 XT2
240V 240V
I2t [106 A2s] I2t [106 A2s]

10 10
1SDC21057EF0001
1SDC21058EF0001
1 1
160 A
160 A
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA] x Irms [kA]
XT3
240V
I2t [106 A2s]

10
1SDC21059EF0001
250 A
10-1
10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/15
1SDC210033D0201
415-440V
XT1 XT2
415-440V 415-440V
I2t [106 A2s] I2t [106 A2s]

10 10
1SDC21060EF0001
1SDC21061EF0001
1 1
160 A
160 A
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
XT3
415-440V
I2t [106 A2s]

10
1SDC21062EF0001
250 A
10-1
10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/16
1SDC210033D0201
500V
XT1 XT2
500V 500V
I2t [106 A2s] I2t [106 A2s]

10 10
1SDC21063EF0001
1SDC21064EF0001
1 1
160 A
160 A
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
XT3
500V
I2t [106 A2s]

10
1SDC21065EF0001
250 A
10-1
10-2
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/17
1SDC210033D0201
690V
XT1 XT2
690V 690V
I2t [106 A2s] I2t [106 A2s]

10 10
1SDC21066EF0001
1SDC21067EF0001
1 1
160 A
160 A
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1 10 10 2 1 10 10 2
XT3
690V
I2t [106 A2s]

10
1SDC21068EF0001
1
250 A
10-1
10-2
1 10 10 2
x Irms [kA]
4/18
1SDC210033D0201
Limiting curves
240V
XT1 XT2
240V 240V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10 3 10 3
1SDC21069EF0001
1SDC21070EF0001
10 2 10 2
160 A 160 A
10 10
1 1
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
XT3
240V
Ip [kA]
10 3
1SDC21071EF0001
10 2
250 A
10
1
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/19
1SDC210033D0201
Limiting curves
415-440V
XT1 XT2
415-440V 415-440V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10 3 10 3
1SDC21072EF0001
1SDC21073EF0001
10 2 10 2
160 A 160 A
10 10
1 1
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
XT3
415-440V
Ip [kA]
10 3
1SDC21074EF0001
10 2
250 A
10
1
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/20
1SDC210033D0201
Limiting curves
500V
XT1 XT2
500V 500V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10 3 10 3
1SDC21075EF0001
1SDC21076EF0001
10 2 10 2
160 A
160 A
10 10
1 1
1 10 10 2 10 3 1 10 10 2 10 3
XT3
500V
Ip [kA]
10 3
1SDC21077EF0001
10 2
250 A
10
1
1 10 10 2 10 3
x Irms [kA]
4/21
1SDC210033D0201
Limiting curves
690V
XT1 XT2
690V 690V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10 2 10 2
1SDC21078EF0001
1SDC21079EF0001
160 A
160 A
10 10
1 1
1 10 10 2 1 10 10 2
XT3
690V
Ip [kA]
10 2
1SDC21080EF0001
250 A
10
1
1 10 10 2
x Irms [kA]
4/22
1SDC210033D0201
Temperature performances
All the Tmax XT circuit-breakers can be used under the following environmental conditions:
Q -25°C +70°C: range of atmospheric temperature where the circuit-breaker is installed;
Q -40°C +70°C: range of atmospheric temperature where the circuit-breaker is stored.
The circuit-breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip unit have the thermal element set for a reference
temperature of +40°C. With the same setting, for temperatures other than +40°C there is a variation
in the thermal trip threshold as indicated in the tables below.
XT1 with thermomagnetic trip units

T amb (°C) 30 40 50 60 70
In [A] MIN [A] MAX [A] MIN [A] MAX [A] MIN [A] MAX [A] MIN [A] MAX [A] MIN [A] MAX [A]
16 12 17 11.2 16 11 15 10 14 9 13
20 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 18 11 16
25 18 26 17.5 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 24 34 22.4 32 21 30 20 28 18 26
40 29 42 28 40 27 38 25 35 23 33
50 37 53 35 50 33 47 31 44 28 41
63 46 66 44.1 63 41 59 39 55 36 51
80 59 84 56 80 53 75 49 70 46 65
100 74 105 70 100 66 94 61 88 57 81
125 92 131 87.5 125 82 117 77 109 71 102
160 118 168 112 160 105 150 98 140 91 130

T amb (°C) 30 40 50 60 70
1.6 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6 1.1 1.5 1.0 1.4 0.9 1.3
2 1.5 2.2 1.4 2.0 1.3 1.9 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6
2.5 1.8 2.6 1.8 2.5 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.4 2.0
3 2.5 3.5 2.1 3.0 2.0 2.8 1.8 2.6 1.6 2.3
4 2.9 4.2 2.8 4.0 2.6 3.7 2.5 3.5 2.2 3.2
6.3 4.6 6.6 4.4 6.3 4.1 5.9 3.9 5.5 3.6 5.1
8 5.9 8.4 5.6 8.0 5.3 7.5 4.9 7.0 4.6 6.5
10 7.4 10.5 7.0 10.0 6.5 9.3 6.1 8.7 5.7 8.1
12.5 9.2 13.2 8.8 12.5 8.2 11.7 7.6 10.9 7.1 10.1
16 11.9 17.0 11.2 16.0 10.5 15.0 9.8 14.0 9.1 13.0
20 14.7 21.0 14.0 20.0 13.3 19.0 11.9 17.0 11.2 16.0
32 23.8 34.0 22.4 32.0 21.0 30.0 19.6 28.0 18.2 26.0
40 29.4 42.0 28.0 40.0 25.9 37.0 24.5 35.0 22.4 32.0
50 37.1 53.0 35.0 50.0 32.9 47.0 30.1 43.0 28.0 40.0
63 46.2 66.0 44.1 63.0 41.3 59.0 38.5 55.0 35.7 51.0
80 58.8 84.0 56.0 80.0 52.5 75.0 49.0 70.0 45.5 65.0
100 73.5 105.0 70.0 100.0 65.1 93.0 60.9 87.0 56.7 81.0
125 92.4 132.0 87.5 125.0 81.9 117.0 76.3 109.0 70.7 101.0
160 117.6 168.0 112.0 160.0 105.0 150.0 97.3 139.0 90.3 129.0

T amb (°C) 30 40 50 60 70
63 46 66 44 63 41 59 39 55 36 51
80 59 84 56 80 53 75 48 69 45 64
100 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 80
125 92 132 88 125 81 116 76 108 70 100
160 118 168 112 160 104 149 97 139 90 129
200 148 211 140 200 130 186 121 173 113 161
250 184 263 175 250 163 233 151 216 141 201
4/23
1SDC210033D0201

T amb (°C) 30 40 50 60 70
In [A] MIN[A] MAX [A] MIN[A] MAX [A] MIN[A] MAX [A] MIN[A] MAX [A] MIN[A] MAX [A]
16 12 17 11 16 10 14 9 13 8 12
20 16 23 14 20 12 17 11 15 9 13
25 19 27 18 25 16 23 15 21 13 19
32 25 36 22 32 19 27 17 24 15 21
40 30 43 28 40 26 37 24 34 21 30
50 38 54 35 50 32 46 29 42 27 39
63 47 67 44 63 41 58 37 53 33 48
80 60 86 56 80 52 74 46 66 41 58
100 74 106 70 100 67 95 60 85 53 75
125 94 134 88 125 81 115 74 105 67 95
160 118 168 112 160 105 150 96 137 91 130
200 147 210 140 200 133 190 123 175 112 160
225 168 241 158 225 146 208 133 190 119 170
250 183 262 175 250 168 240 161 230 154 220
The electronic overcurrent trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature
varies.
However, even if heating does not affect the trip thresholds of the electronic trip units, in the case of
temperatures exceeding +40°C it is advisable to reduce the maximum setting for protection against
overloads (L) to preserve the copper parts of the circuit-breaker against high temperatures.
The same considerations can be done about the switch-disconnectors and magnetic only circuit-
breakers.
The table and graph below show the maximum adjustment at which the threshold I1 of the overcurrent
protection (L) must be set according to the ambient temperature and to the type of terminals used.
XT1 - Fixed circuit-breakers with only magnetic trip unit or switch-disconnectors

40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A]
F 160 160 153 136
F = Front flat terminals
In [A]
180
1SDC21081EF0001
175
170
165
160
155
150
145
140
135
130
125
120
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/24
1SDC210033D0201
XT2 - Fixed circuit-breakers with only magnetic and electronic trip unit
40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
F 160 160 146 131
In [A]
180
1SDC21087EF0001
175
170
165
160
155
150
145
140
135
130
125
120
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
XT3 - Fixed circuit-breakers with only magnetic trip unit or switch-disconnectors

40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
F 250 250 228 204
In [A]
260
1SDC21082EF0001
255
250
245
240
235
230
225
220
215
210
205
200
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/25
1SDC210033D0201
XT4 - Fixed circuit-breakers with only magnetic, electronic trip unit and switch-disconnector
40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
F 250 250 238 213
In [A]
260
1SDC21088EF0001
255
250
245
240
235
230
225
220
215
210
205
200
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/26
1SDC210033D0201
Dissipated powers
To ensure service continuity of the plants, how to keep the temperature within acceptable levels for
operation of the various devices and not only for the circuit-breakers must be carefully assessed,
for example with recourse to forced ventilation in the switchboards and in the rooms where they
are installed.
The table gives the dissipated power values per single pole at the rated current In for each circuit-
breaker used. The total maximum dissipated power for a circuit-breaker used at 50/60Hz is equal
to the power per single pole multiplied by the number of poles.
Power In [A] XT1 XT2 XT3 XT4

[W/pole] F P F P/W F P F P/W
1.6 2.00 2.38
2 2.38 2.76
2.5 2.47 2.85
3 2.76 3.23
4 2.47 2.85
6.3 3.33 3.90
8 2.57 3.04
10 2.95 3.42
12.5 1.05 1.24
TMD
16 1.50 1.60 1.33 1.52
TMA
20 1.80 2.00 1.62 1.90
TMG
25 2.00 2.80
MF
32 2.10 3.20 2.57 3.04 4.44 4.44
MA
40 2.60 4.60 3.71 4.37 4.49 4.72
50 3.70 5.00 4.09 4.75 4.68 4.92
63 4.30 6.00 4.85 5.70 4.30 5.10 5.30 5.76
80 4.80 7.20 5.80 6.84 4.80 5.80 5.52 6.00
100 7.00 10.00 8.08 9.50 5.60 6.80 6.24 6.96
125 10.70 14.70 11.40 13.97 6.60 7.90 7.44 8.64
160 15.00 20.00 16.15 19.00 7.90 9.50 8.88 10.80
200 13.20 15.80 11.88 14.88
250 17.80 21.40 16.44 21.12
4/27
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Index
Tmax XT1 - Installation for fixed circuit-breaker .....................................................................5/2
Tmax XT1 - Terminals for fixed circuit-breaker .......................................................................5/5
Tmax XT1 - Accessories for fixed circuit-breaker ...................................................................5/8
Tmax XT1 - Installation for plug-in circuit-breaker ................................................................5/14
Tmax XT1 - Terminals for plug-in circuit-breaker ..................................................................5/17
Tmax XT1 - Accessories for plug-in circuit-breaker ..............................................................5/20
Tmax XT2 - Installation for fixed circuit-breaker ...................................................................5/21

Tmax XT2 - Terminals for fixed circuit-breaker .....................................................................5/24
Tmax XT2 - Accessories for fixed circuit-breaker .................................................................5/28
Tmax XT2 - Installation for withdrawable circuit-breaker......................................................5/43
Tmax XT2 - Terminals for withdrawable circuit-breaker ........................................................5/46
Tmax XT2 - Accessories for withdrawable circuit-breaker ...................................................5/50


Tmax XT4 - Installation for withdrawable circuit-breaker......................................................5/98
Tmax XT4 - Terminals for withdrawable circuit-breaker ......................................................5/101
Tmax XT4 - Accessories for withdrawable circuit-breaker .................................................5/106
Distances to be respected ..................................................................................................5/109
5/1
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Installation for fixed circuit-breaker
Fixing on support sheet
Caption
2 Overall dimension of optional

wiring ducts
1SDC21077CF0001
A
With standard flange III - IV 74
III - IV 71
Without flange
III - IV 79
Fixing on DIN 50022 rail
Caption
1 Bracket for fixing

wiring ducts
1SDC21078CF0001
5/2
1SDC210033D0201
Drilling template for circuit-breaker fixing
1SDC21003DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Flanges
Caption
1 Flange for circuit-breaker III
2 Flange for circuit-breaker IV
3 Flange for circuit-breaker III

with RC Sel - RC Inst residual
current release

with RC Sel - RC Inst residual
current release
5 Flange for fixed circuit-breaker

III-IV with direct motor operator
(MOD)
6 Flange for circuit-breaker III-IV

with direct rotary handle (RHD)
7 Optional flange
1SDC21007DF0001
5/3
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Drilling templates compartment door
With standard flange
1SDC21002DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21006DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES 3-4 POLES
With optional flange

1SDC21001DF0001
1SDC21000DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/4
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Terminals for fixed circuit-breaker
Terminals F
Caption
1 Front terminals for busbars

connection
Note: 25mm insulating barriers between

phases (compulsory) provided
1SDC21079CF0001
Terminals EF
Caption
2 Front extended terminals
3 High terminal covers with

degree of protection IP40
(optional) not provided
5 100mm insulating barriers

between phases (compulsory)
provided
1SDC21080CF0001
Terminals ES
Caption
4 Front extended spread termi-

nals for busbar connection

provided
1SDC21081CF0001
5/5
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1x1.5...50mm2 terminals FCCuAl
Caption
1 1x1.5...50mm2 front terminal

FCCuAl
3 25mm insulating barriers be-

tween phases (compulsory)
provided
1SDC21082CF0001
1x35...95mm2 terminals FCCuAl
Caption
1 External terminal FCCuAl

(optional) provided
1SDC21017FF0001
Terminals FCCu
Caption
2 Front terminal FCCuAl

1SDC21083CF0001
phases (compulsory) provided as

standard with the circuit-breaker
Terminals MC
Caption
4 Terminal covers with degree

of protection IP40 (optional)
provided
5 Front terminal for multicable

connection
1SDC21084CF0001
5/6
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals R
Caption
1 Adjustable rear terminals
2 Bottom terminal covers with

3 Drilling template for circuit-

breaker III fixing on sheet

breaker IV fixing on sheet
1SDC21085CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/7
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Accessories for fixed circuit-breaker
Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit-breakers (RHD)
DRILLING: SEE DET. “A”
1SDC21093CF0001
MINIMUM ROTATION RADIUS FOR
DOOR FULCRUM
Caption
2 Rotary handle operating

mechanism on circuit-
breaker RHD
4 Door drilling template with

direct rotary handle
5/8
1SDC210033D0201
Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door (RHE)
heights for door with maximum distance
heights for door with minimum distance
1SDC21094CF0001
MINIMUM ROTATION RADIUS FOR
DOOR FULCRUM
Caption
1 Transmitted rotary handle

transmitted rotary mandly
5 Transmission unit
5/9
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Direct motor operator (MOD)
Caption
3 Key lock (on request)
4 Direct motor operator (MOD)
5 Drilling template of door with

direct rotary handle without
flange

7 Cables connection
1SDC21098CF0001
1SDC21099CF0001
5/10
1SDC210033D0201
RC Inst and RC Sel residual current release for 3 poles circuit-breaker
Caption

connection
2 Terminal covers with degree of

protection IP40

direct rotary handle with flange

flange

breaker fixing on sheet
1SDC21095CF0001
A
With standard flange III 74
Without flange III 71
5/11
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption

connection

protection IP40


flange

1SDC21096CF0001
A
With standard flange IV 74
Without flange IV 71
5/12
1SDC210033D0201
RC Sel 200 4 poles residual current release
Caption

connection

protection IP40


1SDC21097CF0001
5/13
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Installation for plug-in circuit-breaker
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
Fixing at 50mm A
III - IV 121
Without flange
III - IV 129
Fixing at 70mm for A

extended front terminals
1SDC21086CF0001
III - IV 141
Without flange
III - IV 149
Drilling template for fixing circuit-breaker
1SDC21004DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21005DF0001
4 POLES
3 POLES
5/14
1SDC210033D0201
Flanges
Caption
1 Flange for plug-in circuit-

breaker III

breaker III-IV with direct motor
operator (MOD)

breaker III-IV with direct rotary
handle RHD
7 Optional flange
1SDC21008DF0001
5/15
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21009DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21011DF0001

1SDC21013DF0001
1SDC21012DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/16
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Terminals for plug-in circuit-breaker
Terminals EF
20.5
40.5
1SDC21087CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm FIXING AT 70mm
Caption

provided
Terminals ES
1SDC21088CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

nals

provided
7 Adaptor (compulsory) not

provided
5/17
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1x1.5...50mm2 terminals FCCuAl
Caption
1 1x1.5...50mm2 front terminal

FCCuAl
5 Adaptor (compulsory) optional

provided
1SDC21089CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

(optional) provided
1SDC21018FF0001
Terminals FCCu
24.5
Caption
4 Terminals FCCu

provided
1SDC21090CF0001

FIXING AT 50mm
5/18
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals MC
Caption

provided

connection

provided
1SDC21091CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Terminals HR/VR
Caption
1 Rear vertical terminals
2 Rear horizontal terminals

1SDC21092CF0001

between phases (compul-
sory) not provided
5/19
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT1 - Accessories for plug-in circuit-breaker
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
4 Direct motor operator (MOD)

flange

7 Cables connection
1SDC21098CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
1SDC21099CF0001
5/20
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Fixed circuit-breaker fixing on sheet
Caption
2 Optional wiring ducts
1SDC21000CF0001
A
III - IV 83.5
Without flange
III - IV 91.5
Fixed circuit-breaker fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail
Caption
1SDC21001CF0001
Drilling templates and support sheet

1SDC21021DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/21
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Flanges
Caption

III

IV

III-IV with MOE and FLD

with direct rotary handle RHD

with fixed residual current and
front terminals
9 Optional flange
1SDC21044CF0001
1SDC21045CF0001
5/22
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21042CF0001
1SDC21014DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21018DF0001
3-4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21015DF0001
1SDC21037CF0001
3-4 POLES
5/23
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals F
Caption

not provided


connection

1SDC21003CF0001
Terminals EF
Caption

protection IP40 (optional) not
provided

provided
Note: insulated plate (compulsory)

provided
1SDC21004CF0001
5/24
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals ES
1SDC21005CF0001
Caption

nals

provided

provided

Caption
1 1x1...95mm2 terminals FCCuAl

provided
1SDC21096EF0001
Caption

(optional) provided
1SDC21019FF0001
5/25
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21020FF0001
Caption
2 2x35...95mm2 terminals
FCCuAl

provided
Terminals FCCu
Caption
7 Terminals FCCu
1SDC21098EF0001

5/26
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals MC
Caption
6 Multicable terminals
1SDC21099EF0001
Terminals R
Caption
1 Rear adjustable terminals

(optional) provided

1SDC21006CF0001
1SDC21002CF0001
1SDC21007CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/27
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit-breaker (RHD)
1SDC21021CF0001
Caption MINIMUM ROTATION RADIUS
FOR DOOR FULCRUM
2 Rotary handle operating mech-

anism on circuit-breaker

5/28
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21020CF0001
MINIMUM ROTATION RADIUS
FOR DOOR FULCRUM
Caption
1 Transmitted rotary handle

operating mechanism

transmitted rotary mandly
5 Transmission unit
5/29
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Stored energy motor operator (MOE)
3 POLES
1SDC21018CF0001
4 POLES
Caption
1 Stored energy motor operator

(MOE)
2 Key lock optional
4 Drilling template of door

with direct rotary handle con
mostrina (MOE)

direct rotary handle senza
mostrina (MOE)


5/30
1SDC210033D0201
Front for lever operating mechanism (FLD)
1SDC21019CF0001
Caption
2 Key lock optional
3 Front for lever operating mech-

anism (FLD)

(FLD)

flange (FLD)
5/31
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Residual current RC Sel
1SDC21022CF0001
1SDC21023CF0001
4 POLES
1SDC21000FF0001
Caption
1 Residual current
2 Front terminals

direct rotary handle and fixing
with flange

without flange A
Without flange IV 83.5
5/32
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Plug-in circuit-breaker fixing on sheet
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
Fixing at 50mm A
III - IV 133.5
Without flange
III - IV 141.5

1SDC21008CF0001
III - IV 153.5
Without flange
III - IV 161.5
Drilling templates for support sheet
1SDC21005DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21004DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/33
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Flanges
Caption
1 Flange for circuit-breaker

rimovibile III
3 Flange for plug-in circuit-breaker


with direct rotary handle (RHD)

with residual current and plug-
in with front terminals
9 Optional flange
1SDC21044CF0001
1SDC21045CF0001
5/34
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21042CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21043CF0001
3-4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21039CF0001
1SDC21037CF0001
3-4 POLES
5/35
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals EF
1SDC21009CF0001
1SDC21009CF0001
Caption

provided

provided
Terminals ES
1SDC21010CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

nals

provided

provided

provided
5/36
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1 1x1...95mm 2 front terminal

FCCuAl

provided
1SDC21011CF0001
provided
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

(optional) provided
1SDC21021FF0001
Caption

(optional) provided
1SDC21022FF0001
5/37
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals FCCu
Caption
5 Terminals FCCu

provided
1SDC21001FF0001
Terminals MC
Caption

(optional) provided

provided
1SDC21002FCF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
5/38
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals HR/VR
1SDC21012CF0001
Caption

not provided
5/39
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21030CF0001
1SDC21031CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 MOE
4 Key lock optional

provided


flange
5/40
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21028CF0001
1SDC21029CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

anism (FLD)
4 Key lock optional

provided


flange
5/41
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21024CF0001
1SDC21023CF0001
4 POLES
Caption
1SDC21025CF0001
1SDC21026CF0001
1 Residual current
3 Fixed part
4 Moving part

provided
6 Extended terminals

with flange

direct rotary handle and fixing A
without flange
9 Drilling template for circuit- Without flange IV 133,5
5/42
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT2 - Installation for withdrawable circuit-breaker
Fixing on sheet
ISOLATING DISTANCE
1SDC21013CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 FLD (FLD o RHD o RHE o A

MOE) mandatory for withdra- III - IV Fixing at 50mm 170
wable version With standard flange Fixing at 70mm for
III - IV 190
6 Optional wiring ducts
5/43
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21005DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21004DF0001
3-4 POLES
Flanges
Caption

III-IV withdrawable

withdrawable III-IV with direct
rotary handle RHD

residual current IV withdraw-
able with front extended
terminals
C D
1SDC21046CF0001
RHD 111 124.5

FLD - MOE 114.3 134.5
5/44
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21042CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21043CF0001
3-4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21039CF0001
1SDC21037CF0001
3-4 POLES
5/45
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT2 - Terminals for withdrawable circuit-breaker
Terminals EF
ISOLATING DISTANCE
1SDC21014CF0001
Caption
2 Moving part
3 FLD (FLD or RHD or RHE or

MOE) mandatory for withdra-
wable version

provided

provided
Terminals ES
1SDC21015CF0001
Caption
FIXING AT 50mm

provided

nals

provided

provided
5/46
1SDC210033D0201
Caption

provided
4 1x1...95mm2 front terminals

FcCuAl

provided
1SDC21016CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

(optional) provided
1SDC21023FF0001
Caption

2x95mm2

(optional) provided
1SDC21024FF0001
5/47
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals FCCu
Caption
2 Terminals FCCu

provided

Terminals MC
Caption

(optional) provided

provided
1SDC21003FF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
5/48
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals HR/VR
1SDC21017CF0001
Caption

not provided
5/49
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Tmax XT2 - Accessories for withdrawable circuit-breaker
Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit-breakers (RHD)
1SDC21035CF0001
1SDC21036CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part


provided

5/50
1SDC210033D0201

FOR DOOR FULCRUM
Caption
1 Fixed part heights for door with minimum distance
2 Moving part

anism on the compartment
door (RHE)

provided
1SDC21034CF0001

transmetted rotary handle
7 Transmission unit
5/51
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21020DF0001
Caption
1SDC21019DF0001
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

provided
6 Key lock optional

A
(MOE) Motor operator MOE III - IV 222
5/52
1SDC210033D0201
Front for lever operating (FLD)
1SDC21032CF0001
1SDC21033CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 Front for lever operating (FLD)

provided
A
6 Key lock optional
Front for lever operating FLD III - IV 170
5/53
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Residual current RC Sel 4 poles
VIEW FROM “B”
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 Front for lever operating
4 Residual current connector

(optional)
1SDC21027CF0001

provided
6 Residual current
8 Fixing screws for fixed part of

connector
9 Door drilling template and

flange fixing
5/54
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Fixing on sheet
Caption

wiring ducts
1SDC21047CF0001
III - IV 71
Without flange
III - IV 79
Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail
Caption
1 Bracket for fixing 1SDC21048CF0001
5/55
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Drilling template for circuit-breaker fixing
1SDC21069CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Flanges
Caption
1 Flange for fixed circuit-breaker III
2 Flange for fixed circuit-breaker IV
3 Flange for circuit-breaker with

direct motor operator MOD
4 Flange for circuit-breaker with

direct rotary handle (RHD)
5 Flange for circuit-breaker III with

residual current
6 Flange for circuit-breaker IV with

residual current
7 Optional flange
1SDC21074CF0001
5/56
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21071CF0001
1SDC21072CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21073CF0001

1SDC21023DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/57
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals F
Caption

connection

1SDC21049CF0001
Terminals EF
Caption

provided

provided
1SDC21050CF0001
Terminals ES
Caption

nals for busbars connection

provided
1SDC21051CF0001
5/58
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1 1x70...185mm 2 terminals
FCCuAl

1SDC21004FF0001
1SDC21005FF0001
Caption
FCCuAl

provided
4 P ro v i d e d re a r i n s u l a t e d
plate (mandatory for CuAl
2x150mm2 cables)

1SDC21052CF0001
breaker fixing on sheet III with

rear insulated plate

breaker fixing on sheet IV with
rear insulated plate
5/59
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals FCCu
Caption
6 Front terminals FCCu

1SDC21006FF0001
Terminals MC
Caption

provided

connection
1SDC21007FF0001
5/60
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals R
Caption

(optional) provided
3 Drilling tamplate for circuit-

4 Drilling tamplate for circuit-

1SDC21053CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/61
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
DRILLING: SEE DET. “A”
1SDC21059CF0001

FOR DOOR FULCRUM
Caption

mechanism on circuit-breaker
RHD

5/62
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21058CF0001

FOR DOOR FULCRUM
Caption

1SDC21060CF0001
mechanism on the compartment

door (RHE)

transmetted rotary handle
(RHE)
5 Transmission unit
5/63
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21064CF0001
1SDC21066CF0001
Caption
4 Direct motor operator MOD


flange
5/64
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1 Front terminals for cables con-

nection

protection IP40


flange

1SDC21061CF0001
A
With standard flange III 74
Without flange III 71
5/65
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption
1 Front terminals for cables con-

nection

protection IP40


flange

1SDC21062CF0001
A
Without flange IV 71
5/66
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
1SDC21054CF0001
Fixing at 50mm A
III - IV 121
Without flange
III - IV 129

III - IV 141
Without flange
III - IV 149
5/67
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21070CF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Flanges
Caption

breaker III

breaker IV

breaker with direct motor
operator MOD
7 Optional flange
1SDC21024DF0001
5/68
1SDC210033D0201
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21076CF0001
Without flange
1SDC21075CF0001

1SDC21068CF0001
1SDC21067CF0001
3-4 POLES
5/69
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals EF
1SDC21055CF0001
Caption

provided
Terminals ES
1SDC21056CF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

nals for busbars connection

provided
5/70
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1 1x70...185mm2 front terminal

FCCuAl
1SDC21025DF0001
Caption
1 1x35...95 mm2 external termi-

nal FCCuAl

3 Rear insulated plate (compul-

sory with 2x150mm2)
4 Drilling template for fixing

circuit-breaker III with rear
insulated plate
1SDC21025FF0001
5 Drilling template for fixing

circuit-breaker IV with rear
insulated plate
5/71
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals FCCu
Caption
4 Front terminals FCCu

1SDC21008FF0001
Terminals MC
Caption

(compulsory with multicable)

connection
1SDC21008FF0001
5/72
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals HR/VR
1SDC21057CF0001

Caption

not provided
5/73
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
FIXING AT 50mm
1SDC21065CF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
4 Direct motor opetrator MOD


flange
5/74
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Fixing on sheet
Caption

wiring ducts
A
1SDC21033DF0001
III - IV 83.5
Without flange
III - IV 91.5
Fixing on DIN 50022 rail
Caption
1SDC21034DF0001

1SDC21035DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/75
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Flanges
Caption
1 Flange for fixed circuit-breaker III
2 Flange for fixed circuit-breaker IV


with direct rotary handle RHD

IV with front extended terminals
and residual current
8 Optional flange
1SDC21036DF0001
5/76
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21037DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21038DF0001
3-4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21039DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/77
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals F
Caption

not provided

3 Front terminals for connection

busbar

1SDC21040DF0001
Terminals EF
Caption

provided

provided

provided
1SDC21041DF0001
5/78
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals ES
1SDC21042DF0001
Caption

nals

provided

provided
Caption
1 1x1...185mm2 terminals
FCCuAl

provided
1SDC21043DF0001
5/79
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21044DF0001
Caption
FCCuAl

provided
2x150mm2 cables)

breaker IV fixing with insulating
courtes plate

breaker III fixing with insulating
courtes plate
5/80
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals FCCu
Caption
1 Terminals FCCu

1SDC21045DF0001
Terminals MC
Caption

provided
1SDC21046DF0001
5/81
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals R
Caption

(optional) provided


1SDC21047DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
5/82
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption


1SDC21048DF0001

FOR DOOR FULCRUM
5/83
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Rotary handle operating mechanism of the compartment door (RHE)

FOR DOOR FULCRUM
1SDC21049DF0001
Caption

anism of the compartment door
3 Drilling template for RHE
5 Transmission unit
5/84
1SDC210033D0201
Caption

(MOE)
1SDC21050DF0001
2 Key lock optional

direct rotary handle with flange 3 POLES 4 POLES
(MOE)

flange (MOE)


5/85
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption
1 Front for lever operating

mechanism (FLD)
2 Key lock optional

1SDC21051DF0001

(FLD)
3 POLES 4 POLES

flange (FLD)


5/86
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21052DF0001
Caption
1 Residual current
2 Front terminals

with flange

without flange A
9 Drilling template for circuit- Without flange IV 83.5
5/87
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Fixing on sheet
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
1SDC21053DF0001
Fixing at 50mm A
III - IV 133.5
Without flange
III - IV 141.5
Fixing at 70mm for front A

extended terminals
III - IV 153.5
Without flange
III - IV 161.5
5/88
1SDC210033D0201
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21054DF0001
3-4 POLES
5/89
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Flanges
Caption

breaker III

breaker IV
3 Flange for plug-in circuit-breaker


with direct rotary handle

breaker IV with front extended
terminals and residual current
8 Optional flange
1SDC21055DF0001
5/90
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21056DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
1SDC21057DF0001
3-4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21058DF0001
B=142 C=162
3 - POLES
3-4 4 POLI
5/91
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals EF
1SDC21059DF0001
Caption

provided

provided
Terminals ES
1SDC21060DF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption

nals

provided

provided

provided
5/92
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1 1x1...185mm2 front terminals

FCCuAl

provided

provided
1SDC21061DF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Caption
1 2x150mm2 external terminal

FCCuAl

(optional) provided
1SDC21026FF0001
Terminals FCCu
Caption
5 Terminals FCCu

provided

1SDC21062DF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
5/93
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals MC
Caption
3 Provided high terminal covers

with degree of protection IP40
(mandatory for multicables
terminals)

provided
1SDC21063DF0001
FIXING AT 50mm
Terminals HR/VR
Caption

1SDC21064DF0001

not provided
5/94
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21065DF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

(MOE)
4 Key lock optional

provided


flange
5/95
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21066DF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

anism (FLD)

provided


flange
5/96
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21067DF0001
Caption
1 Residual current
3 Fixed part
4 Moving part

provided

with flange

without flange B
breaker fixing on sheet Without flange IV 133.5
5/97
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Fixing on sheet
ISOLATING DISTANCE
1SDC21068DF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 FLD (FLD or RHD or RHE or A

MOE) mandatory with withdra-
wable version III - IV Fixing at 50mm 170
With standard flange Fixing at 70mm for front
III - IV 190
6 Optional wiring ducts extended terminals
5/98
1SDC210033D0201
3 POLES 4 POLES
1SDC21069DF0001
3-4 POLES
Flanges
Caption

estraibile
6 Flange for circuit-breaker resi-

dual current IV withdeawable
with front extended terminals
C D
1SDC21070DF0001
RHD 111 124.5

FLD - MOE 114.3 134.5
5/99
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
1SDC21071DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Without flange
3-4 POLES
1SDC21072DF0001
3 POLES 4 POLES

1SDC21073DF0001
B=142 C=162
3 - POLES
3-4 4 POLI
5/100
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals EF
1SDC21074DF0001
Caption

provided

provided
5/101
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals ES
1SDC21075DF0001
FIXING AT 50 mm
Caption

provided

nals

provided

provided

Caption

provided
4 Front terminals FCCuAl

provided
1SDC21076DF0001
FIXING AT 50 mm
5/102
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
1SDC21077DF0001
FCCuAl 3 POLES 4 POLES
provided
2x150mm2 cables)

breaker III fixing with insulating
courtes plate

breaker IV fixing with insulating
courtes plate
5/103
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Terminals FCCu
Caption
2 Terminale FCCu

provided

1SDC21078DF0001
FIXING AT 50 mm
Terminals MC
Caption

(optional) provided

provided
1SDC21079DF0001
FIXING AT 50 mm
5/104
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals HR/VR
FIXING AT 50 mm FIXING AT 50 mm
1SDC21080DF0001
Caption

not provided
5/105
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Caption
1SDC21081DF0001
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

anism FLD

direct rotary handle and fixed
flange

provided
5/106
1SDC210033D0201
1SDC21082DF0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

(MOE)

flange

provided
7 Key lock optional
5/107
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Residual current RC Sel 4 poles
VIEW FROM “B”
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part

anism
4 Connector residual current

(optional)

provided
1SDC21083DF0001
6 Residual current
8 Fixing screws for fixed part of

connector

direct rotary handle and fixed
flange
5/108
1SDC210033D0201
Overall dimensions
Distances to be respected
Insulation distances for installation in metallic cubicle
A B C
Un≤440V
(mm) (mm) (mm)
XT1 25 20 20
XT2 30 20 25
XT3 50 20 20
XT4 30 20 25
A B C
Un>440V
(mm) (mm) (mm)
XT1 25 20 20
XT2 50 20 45
XT3 50 20 20
XT4 50 20 45
Minimum center distance between two circuit-breaker side-by-side
Circuit-breaker width Centre distance I

(mm) (mm)
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles
XT1 76 102 76 102
XT2 90 120 90 120
XT3 105 140 105 140
XT4 105 140 105 140
Minimum centre distance for superimposed circuit-breakers
H
(mm)
XT1 80
XT2 120
XT3 140
XT4 160
Caption
1 Connection - not insulated

2 Insulated cable
3 Cable terminal
5/109
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams
Index
Information on how to read the diagrams ...............................................................................6/2
Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14…3-26 Standards) ...............................................6/3
Wiring Diagrams of the circuit-breakers ..................................................................................6/4
Wiring Diagrams of the accessories ........................................................................................6/8
Resetting instructions............................................................................................................6/19
6/1
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams
Information on how to read the diagrams
State of operation shown

The diagrams are shown in the following conditions:
– fixed version circuit-breaker, open;
– withdrawable or plug-in version circuit-breaker, open and connected;
– contactor for starting the motor open;
– circuits de-energised;
– trip units not tripped;
– motor operator with springs charged.
The diagram shows a circuit-breaker or a switch-disconnector in the withdrawable or plug-in version,

but is also valid for fixed version circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors.
For the fixed version circuit-breakers, the auxiliary circuits are headed at terminal box XV: connectors
J.. and XB.., XC.., XD.. and XE.. are not supplied.
For the plug-in version circuit-breakers, the auxiliary circuits are headed at connectors XB.., XC..,
XD.. and XE..: connectors J.. are not supplied.
For the withdrawable version circuit-breakers, the auxiliary circuits are headed at connectors J..:
connectors XB.., XC.., XD.. and XE.. are not supplied.
6/2
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams
Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14 …3-26 Standards)
Thermal effect Conductors with corded Opening contact Overcurrent release

cables (example two with short adjustable time
conductors) delay characteristic
Electromagnetic effect Connection of conductors Changeover contact with Overcurrent release with
momentary break short inverse adjustable
time delay characteristic
Timing Terminal or clamp Closing position contact Overcurrent release with

(limit switch) long inverse adjustable
time delay characteristic
Mechanical connection Socket and plug Opening position contact Overcurrent release for
(female and male) (limit switch) earth fault with short
inverse time characteristic
Manual mechanical Resistor (general symbol) Changeover contact Current relay for
operating mechanism with momentary break unbalance between
(general case) (limit switch) phases
Rotary handle operating Resistor dependent on Contactor Residual current release

mechanism the temperature (closing contact)
Pushbutton operating Motor (general symbol) Power cut-off of switch- Relay for detecting lack
mechanism disconnector power with of phase in a three-phase
automatic opening system
Key operating Three-phase asynchro- Switch-disconnector Relay for detecting

mechanism nous motor, with short- blocked rotor by means
circuited rotor (cage) of current measurement
Cam operating Current transformer Control coil Lamp, general symbol

mechanism (general symbol)
Ground Current transformer with pri- Thermal trip unit Motor with excitation
mary consisting of 4 passing
(general symbol) conductors and with wound in series
secondary, with socket M
Converter separated Closing contact Instantaneous overcurrent Brush

galvanically release
Conductors in shielded
cable (example two
conductors)
6/3
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams of the circuit-breakers
State of operation
1SDC21084DF0001
1SDC21085DF0001
1SDC21086DF0001
Four-pole circuit-breaker with Four-pole circuit-breaker with Four-pole circuit-breaker with
thermomagnetic trip unit and RC Sel 200 thermomagnetic trip unit and electronic trip unit and RC Sel
or RC B type residual current release RC Sel residual current release residual current release
1SDC21087DF0001
1SDC21088DF0001
Three-pole fixed version circuit-breaker Diagram recommended for three-pole plug-in or

with current transformer on the neutral withdrawable version circuit-breakers with current transformer
conductor outside the circuit-breaker on the neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker
6/4
1SDC210033D0201
Description of Figures
Fig. 47 = Current transformer circuit on the neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker (for plug-in or with-
drawable version circuit-breaker).
Notes
G) In the case of a three-pole fixed version circuit-breaker with a current transformer on the neutral
conductor outside the circuit-breaker, when you want to remove the circuit-breaker it is necessary
to short-circuit the terminals of the TI/N transformer.
Caption
= Diagram figure number
* = See the note indicated by the letter
J.. = Connectors for the auxiliary contacts of the withdrawable version circuit-breaker; extraction of the
connectors takes place at the same time as that of the circuit-breaker.
K51 = Electronic trip unit:
– of overcurrent type Ekip LS/I, Ekip N-LS/I, Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG
– of motor protection type Ekip I, Ekip M-LIU, Ekip M-LRIU
– of generator protection Ekip G-LSI
K87 = Residual current release type RC Inst, RC Sel, RC Sel 200, RC B Type
Q = Main circuit-breaker
S75I/1..4 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in the connected position (only provided with plug-
in or withdrawable version circuit-breakers)
S75S/1-2 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in the racked-out position (only provided with
withdrawable version circuit-breakers)
SD = Power supply switch-disconnector of the residual current release type RC Inst, RC Sel, RC Sel 200
or RC B Type
TI = Toroidal current transformer
TI/L1 = Current transformer placed on phase L1
TI/N = Current transformer placed on the neutral
V1 = Circuit-breaker applications
X41 = Circuit connector for external neutral
XG-XH = Electronic trip unit connectors
XV = Terminal boxes of the circuit-breaker applications
YO1 = Opening solenoid of the overcurrent release
YO2 = Opening solenoid of the residual current release
6/5
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams of the circuit-breakers
State of operation
1SDC21090DF0001
1SDC21089DF0001
1SDC21091DF0001
Three-pole or four-pole circuit- Three-pole circuit-breaker Three-pole or four-pole XT1D,
breaker with TMD, TMA or TMG with MA magnetic trip unit XT3D or XT4D
thermomagnetic trip unit switch-disconnector
1SDC21092DF0001
1SDC21093DF0001
1SDC21094DF0001
Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker Four-pole circuit-breaker with
with Ekip LS/I or Ekip G-LSI with Ekip I, Ekip LSI or Ekip LSIG Ekip N-LS/I electronic trip unit
electronic trip unit electronic trip unit
1SDC21095DF0001
1SDC21096DF0001
Three-pole circuit-breaker with Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker

Ekip M-LIU or Ekip M-LRIU with thermomagnetic trip unit and RC Inst
electronic trip unit or RC Sel residual current release
6/6
1SDC210033D0201
Caption
– of motor protection type Ekip I, Ekip M-LIU, Ekip M-LRIU
– of generator protection type Ekip G-LSI
SD = Power supply switch-disconnector of the residual current release type RC Inst, RC Sel, RC Sel 200
or RC B Type
YO2 = Opening solenoid of the residual current release
6/7
1SDC210033D0201
Wiring Diagrams of the accessories
Service releases
1SDC21097DF0001
Fig. 1 = Shunt opening release.
Fig. 2 = Supplementary shunt opening release (only for four-pole circuit-breakers).
Fig. 3 = Permanent shunt opening release.
Fig. 4 = Supplementary permanent shunt opening release (only for four-pole circuit-breakers).
Fig. 5 = Instantaneous undervoltage release (see Notes B and F).
Fig. 6 = Undervoltage release with electronic time delay device outside the circuit-breaker, see note B).
Notes
B) The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit-
breaker or from an independent source: closing is only possible with the release energised (the lock
on closing is made mechanically).
F) Additional external resistor for undervoltage supplied at 380/440V AC and 480/525V AC.
Caption
D = Undervoltage release electronic time delay device (outside the circuit-breaker) (only for voltages up
to 250V)
connectors takes place at the same time as that of the circuit-breaker
Q/0..7 = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
R = Resistor (see note F)
SO = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker
V4 = Indicative apparatus and connections for control and signalling, outside the circuit-breaker
XB.. = Three-way connector for the plug-in version circuit-breaker auxiliary circuits
YO = Shunt opening release
YU = Undervoltage release (see note B)
6/8
1SDC210033D0201
Service releases
1SDC21098DF0001
Fig. 7 = Instantaneous undervoltage release in the version for machine tools with one contact in series (see
notes B, C and F).
Fig. 8 = Instantaneous undervoltage release in the version for machine tools with two contacts in series (see
Notes B, C and F).
Fig. 11 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the residual
current release type RC Inst, RC Sel, RC B Type or RC Sel 200.
Fig. 12 = Residual current release circuits type RC Sel, RC B or RC Sel 200.
Fig. 13 = Two contacts for electrical signalling of residual current release pre-alarm and alarm type RC Sel,
RC B or RC Sel 200.
Notes
B) The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit-
breaker or from an independent source: closing is only possible with the release energised (the lock
on closing is made mechanically).
C) Contacts S4/1 and S4/2 shown in figures 7-8 open the circuit with the circuit-breaker open and
reclose it when a manual closing command is given by means of the rotary handle, in accordance
with the Standards regarding machine tools (in any case closing does not take place if the undervolt-
age release is not supplied).
F) Additional external resistor for undervoltage supplied at 380/440V AC and 480/525V AC.
Caption
R = Resistor (see note F)
S4/1-2 = Early auxiliary contacts activated by the rotary handle of the circuit-breaker (see note C)
S87/1 = Contact for electrical signalling of pre-alarm of the residual current release type RC Sel, RC B or RC
Sel 200
S87/2 = Contact for electrical signalling of alarm of the residual current release type RC Sel, RC B or RC Sel 200
S87/3 = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the residual current release
type RC Sel, RC B or RC Sel 200
XC.. = Six-way connector for the plug-in version circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
YU = Undervoltage release (see note B)
6/9
1SDC210033D0201
Motor operator
1SDC21099DF0001
Fig. 21 = Motor operator with direct action (MOD) (only for fixed or plug-in version circuit-breakers XT1 and
XT3).
Fig. 22 = Motor operator with stored energy (MOE) (only for circuit-breakers XT2 and XT4).
Fig. 23 = A contact for electrical signalling of stored energy motor operator that can be operated remotely.
Caption
A17 = Actuator unit type MOE for the stored energy motor operator
H2 = Signalling lamp for stored energy motor operator blocked
M = Motor with excitation in series for opening and closing the circuit-breaker (fig. 21)
M = Motor for opening the circuit-breaker and spring charging for closing the circuit-breaker (fig. 22)
M1 = Three-phase asynchronous motor
R1 = Motor thermistor
S1 = Contact controlled by the cam of the motor operator
S2 = Contact controlled by the key lock of the motor operator with direct action
S3/1-2 = Contacts controlled by the Auto/Manual selector and key lock of the stored energy motor operator
S4 = Contact controlled by the cam of the motor operator with direct action
S6/1-2 = Contacts controlled by the Auto/Manual selector of the motor operator with direct action
SC = Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit-breaker
V2 = Motor operator applications
XD.. = Nine-way connector for the auxiliary circuits of the plug-in version circuit-breaker
YC = Shunt closing release of the stored energy motor operator
6/10
1SDC210033D0201
Signalling contacts
1SDC21000EF0001
Fig. 31 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and one changeover
contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the magnetic, thermomagnetic
or electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) (only for voltages up to 250V) (see note E).
Fig. 32 = Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed, two changeover
contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the magnetic, thermomag-
netic or electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) and one changeover contact for
electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the thermomagnetic or electronic trip
unit (only for voltages up to 250V).
Fig. 33 = Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and two
changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the magnetic,
thermomagnetic or electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) (only for voltages up to
250V).
Notes
E) The 24V auxiliary power supply unit of fig. 48 must necessarily be installed in the circuit-breaker seats
marked SY/1 and Q/2. Therefore, should you want to install the unit in fig. 48 and the contacts in fig.
31 at the same time, the contacts of fig. 31 must be installed in the adjacent slots; that is, contact
SY/1 in the slot marked SY/2 and contact Q/2 in the slot marked Q/1.
Caption
S51 = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the thermomagnetic or
SY/1..2 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the thermomagnetic trip
units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position)
XE.. = Fifteen-way connector for the auxiliary circuits of the plug-in version circuit-breaker
6/11
1SDC210033D0201
Signalling contacts
1SDC21001EF0001
Fig. 34 = Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open and one changeover contact
for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the magnetic, thermomagnetic or
electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) (only for voltages up to 250V).
Fig. 35 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the ther-
momagnetic electronic trip unit (only for voltages up to 250V).
Fig. 36 = Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and one changeover
or electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) (only for voltages up to 250V).
Fig. 37 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and one changeover
or electronic trip units, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) (only for voltage up to 400V).
Fig. 38 = Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed (only for voltage
up to 400V).
Caption
S51 = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the thermomagnetic or
SY/1 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the thermomagnetic trip
XE.. = Fifteen-way connector for the auxiliary circuits of the plug-in version circuit-breaker
6/12
1SDC210033D0201
Signalling contacts
104 102 114 112 124 122 134 132 142 144 152 154
104
102
114
112
124
122
134
132
142
144
152
154
101
111
121
131
141
151
101 111 121 131 141 151
1SDC21002EF0001
Fig. 39 = Three supplementary changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed
(only for fixed or plug-in version circuit-breakers).
Fig. 41 = First changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of connected (only
for plug-in or withdrawable version circuit-breakers).
Fig. 42 = Second changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of connected (only
Fig. 43 = Third changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of connected(only
Fig. 44 = Fourth changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of connected (only
Fig. 45 = First changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of isolated (only for
withdrawable version circuit-breakers).
Fig. 46 = Second changeover position contact of the circuit-breaker, for electrical signalling of isolated (only
for withdrawable version circuit-breakers).
Fig. 48 = Auxiliary circuits of the 24V auxiliary power supply unit (see note E).
Notes
E) The 24V auxiliary power supply unit of fig. 48 must necessarily be installed in the circuit-breaker seats
marked SY/1 and Q/2. Therefore, should you want to install the unit in fig. 48 and the contacts in fig. 31
at the same time, the contacts of fig. 31 must be installed in the adjacent slots; that is, contact SY/1 in
the slot marked SY/2 and contact Q/2 in the slot marked Q/1.
Caption
– of motor protection type Ekip I, Ekip M-I, Ekip M-LIU, Ekip M-LRIU
– of generator protection type Ekip G-LSI
S75I/1..4 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in connected position (only provided with plug-in
or withdrawable version circuit-breakers)
S75E/1-2 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-out position (only provided with with-
drawable version circuit-breakers)
WI = Serial interface with the trip unit accessories
X3 = Connector of the circuit for the 24V auxiliary power supply unit
A18 = 24V auxiliary power supply unit (See note E)
XH1 = Electronic trip unit contacts
6/13
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic trip unit Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG, Ekip M-LRIU

connected with Ekip Display or Ekip LED Meter
1SDC21003EF0001
Fig. 51 = Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit type Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip MLRIU connected to display
unit type Ekip Display (display) or Ekip LED Meter (current display).
Caption
A11 = Display unit type Ekip Display (display) or Ekip LED Meter (current display)
– of overcurrent type Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG
– of motor protection type Ekip M-LRIU
6/14
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic trip unit Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU connected
to interface unit Ekip Com and with signalling unit LD030 DO
1SDC21004EF0001
Fig. 52 = Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit type Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU connected to
interface unit type Ekip Com and with signalling unit type LD030 DO.
Caption
A12 = Interface unit type Ekip Com (with MODBUS serial communication)
A13 = Signalling unit type LD030 DO
WS = Serial interface with the control system (MODBUS EIA RS485 interface)
XF = Connector of the Interface unit type Ekip Com
6/15
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic trip unit Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU connected
to interface unit Ekip Com and with actuator unit type MOE-E for
the stored energy motor operator
1SDC21005EF0001
Fig. 23 = One Contact for electrical signalling of stored energy motor operator that can be operated remotely.
Fig. 53 = Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit type Ekip LSI, Ekip LSIG or Ekip M-LRIU connected to
interface unit type Ekip Com and with actuator unit type MOE-E for the stored energy motor operator.
Caption
A12 = Interface unit type Ekip Com (with MODBUS serial communication)
A14 = Actuator unit type MOE-E for the stored energy motor operator
H2 = Signalling lamp for blocked stored energy motor operator
WS = Serial interface with the control system (MODBUS EIA RS485 interface)
XF = Connector of the Interface unit type Ekip Com
6/16
1SDC210033D0201
Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit Ekip M-LRIU
connected to the contactor control unit for starting the motor
PR212/CI (the circuit to the motor thermistor is optional)
X5 W5 JL3 W5 2
X5 W6 JH1 W6 7
X5 W7 JH1 W7 9
X5 W8 JL3 W8 12
1SDC21006EF0001
Fig. 54 = Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit type Ekip M-LRIU connected to the contactor control unit
for starting the motor type PR212/CI (the circuit to the motor thermistor is optional).
Fig. 62 = Motor thermistor circuit.
Caption
A15 = Contactor control unit for starting the motor type PR212/CI
H1 = Signalling lamp
K = Contactor for starting the motor
K51 = Electronic trip unit Ekip M-LRIU
SC3 = Pushbutton for starting the motor
SO3 = Pushbutton for stopping the motor
X42 = Circuit connector for the motor thermistor
X5 = Circuit connector towards PR212/CI unit
6/17
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic trip unit Ekip M-LRIU connected to the contactor

control unit for starting the motor PR212/CI and with ABB AF
series contactor (the circuit to the motor thermistor is optional)
X5 W5 JL3 W5 2
X5 W6 JH1 W6 7
X5 W7 JH1 W7 9
X5 W8 JL3 W8 12
1SDC21007EF0001
Fig. 55 = Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit type Ekip M-LRIU connected to the contactor control unit
for starting the motor type PR212/CI and with ABB AF series contactor (the circuit to the motor
thermistor is optional).
Fig. 62 = Motor thermistor circuit.
Caption
A15 = Contactor control unit for starting the motor type PR212/CI
H1 = Signalling lamp
K = Contactor for starting the motor
K51 = Electronic trip unit Ekip M-LRIU
SC3 = Pushbutton for starting the motor
SO3 = Pushbutton for stopping the motor
X42 = Circuit connector for the motor thermistor
X5 = Circuit connector towards PR212/CI unit
6/18
1SDC210033D0201
Resetting instructions
Instructions for resetting the circuit-breaker following release

tripping
Selection of the type of circuit-breaker resetting depends on design requirements and on service
conditions.
Resetting can take place following tripping of the following releases:
– overcurrent;
– undervoltage;
– shunt opening.
The following three possibilities are suggested (see diagrams below):

1. Only manual resetting
To be wired (by the customer): contact SO1, contact SY/1 and the auxiliary relay KO (only for
MOD).
Opening is prevented until the circuit-breaker is in the tripped position.
To reset the circuit-breaker it is necessary to activate the special lever on the front of the motor
until the circuit-breaker goes into the open position.
2. Electrical resetting making the operator responsible
To be wired (by the customer): contact SO1, SO2, contact SY/1 and the auxiliary relay KO (only
for MOD).
Opening is allows by means of contact S02, which must be placed in custody and can only be
used if the information the person in charge of the control station has received make it possible
to exclude tripping due to a short-circuit, or if the causes of the short-circuit have been removed.
3. Electrical resetting always allowed
To be wired (by the customer): contact SO1, SO2, contact SY/1 and the auxiliary relay KO (only
for MOD).
Opening is always allowed by means of contact S02.
NB: If the magnetic, thermomagnetic or electronic trip unit is present, it is necessary to find the
causes which led to the circuit-breaker being in the tripped position so as to prevent reclosing under
short-circuit conditions. In all cases, manual resetting is always allowed.
6/19
1SDC210033D0201
Resetting instructions
MOD MOE or MOE-E
1SDC21016EF0001
Caption
A17 = Actuator unit type MOE for the stored energy motor operator H2 = Signalling lamp for blocked stored
energy motor operator
KO = Auxiliary opening relay
M = Motor for opening the circuit-breaker and spring charging for closing the circuit-breaker (fig. 22)
S2 = Contact controlled by the key lock of the motor operator with direct action
S6/1-2 = Contacts controlled by the Auto/Manual selector of the motor operator with direct action
SO1,S02 = Pushbuttons or contacts for opening the circuit-breaker (see “Instructions for resetting the
circuit-breaker following release tripping”)
V2 = Motor operator applications
6/20
1SDC210033D0201
Ordering codes
Index
Examples of ordering ............................................................................................................7/2
Ordering codes for XT1
Circuit-breakers .......................................................................................................................7/4
Accessories .............................................................................................................................7/5
Circuit-breakers .....................................................................................................................7/12
Accessories ...........................................................................................................................7/19
Accessories ...........................................................................................................................7/31
Accessories ...........................................................................................................................7/45
7/1
1SDC210033D0201
Ordering codes
Examples of ordering
EXAMPLE 1: Terminals for fixed or fixed part of plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker

To fit the circuit-breaker with terminals other than those supplied on the basic circuit-breaker, the whole
kits (6 or 8 pieces) or half-kits (3 or 4 pieces) can be requested. In the case of a mixed solution, the first
code indicates the terminals to be mounted in the top part of the circuit-breaker, whereas the second
code indicates the terminals to be mounted in the lower part. However, when only 3 or 4 pieces are
requested, you must expressly specify whether the half-kit is to be mounted at the top or at the bottom.
The fixed parts of plug-in and withdrawable version circuit-breakers can be fitted with the terminals
(EF or HR/VR) specifically for the fixed parts, or with the same terminals used for the fixed version
(ES, FCCu, FCCuAl, MC, FB) after the installation of the specific adapter for the fixed part.
XT1B 160A 3p fixed with EF top and FCCuAl bottom terminals for 240mm2 cables
1SDA…R1
XT1B 160 TMD 160-1600 3p F F 066809
EF Extended front terminals 3 pieces 066865
FCCuAl Terminals for Copper/Aluminium cables 1x95...240mm2 3 pieces 067159
XT1 plug-in with EF top and HR/VR bottom terminals

1SDA…R1
XT1B 160 TMD 160-1600 3p F F 066809
KIT P PF EF (Fixed part of plug-in with EF terminals) 068183
KIT P MP (Kit for conversion from Fixed to Moving Part of Plug-in version) 066276
R - Rear HR/VR terminals (terminals for the fixed parts) 066268
XT2 withdrawable with ES top and MC bottom terminals

1SDA…R1
XT2S 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F 067560
KIT W PF EF (Fixed part of withdrawable with EF extended front terminals) 068200
KIT W MP (Kit for conversion from Fixed to Moving Part of Withdrawable version) 066284
ADP Adapter for mounting terminals of the fixed version on the fixed part (2 pieces) 066307
ES Extended spread front terminals 066893
MC Multic-cable terminals 6x2.5...35mm2 066925
EXAMPLE 2: Electrical accessories for plug-in circuit-breaker

With the plug-in version circuit-breakers, disconnection of the auxiliary circuits can be made by
means of two types of connectors:
− socket plug adapter to be fixed at the back of the panel for XT1, XT2, XT3 and XT4;
− socket plug adapter placed in the fixed part of plug-in and on the rear of the circuit-breaker for
XT2 and XT4.
XT2N in plug-in version with SOR, AUX 1Q+1SY, connector on rear of panel
1SDA…R1
XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F 067560
KIT P MP 066278
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V AC 066431
Socket plug connector for panel with 9PINS 066411
XT2N in plug-in version with SOR, AUX 1Q+1SY, connector on rear of circuit-breaker
1SDA…R1
XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F 067560
KIT P MP 066278
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V 066431
SOCKET-PLUG CONNECTOR MP 12PINS XT2-XT4 066413
SOCKET-PLUG CONNECTOR FP 12PINS XT2-XT4 066414
7/2
1SDC210033D0201
EXAMPLE 3: Electrical accessories for withdrawable version
With the circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version it is necessary to only and exclusively order
the accessories dedicated to this version. The electrical accessories specified for the withdrawable
version are fitted both with the connector for fixed part to be installed in the side of the fixed part,
and with the connector for the moving part.
XT2N in withdrawable version with SOR, AUX 1Q+1SY, RHD

1SDA…R1
XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F 067560
KIT W PF EF (Fixed part of withdrawable with EF terminals) 068200
KIT W MP (Kit for conversion from fixed to withdrawable version) 066284
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC for Withdrawable 066355
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V for Withdrawable 066432
RHD Normal Direct Handle for Withdrawable 066476
EXAMPLE 4: Connector for 4th pole of withdrawable circuit-breaker

Should it be necessary to insert a SOR, a UVR, or a PS-SOR in the slot of the fourth pole of a with-
drawable version circuit-breaker, it is necessary to order the connector for 4th pole of withdrawable
circuit-breaker.
XT2S 4p Withdrawable with SOR(4p), UVR(3p)

1SDA…R1
XT2S 160 TMA 160-1600 4p F F 067583
KIT W PF EF (Fixed part of withdrawable with EF terminals) 068202
KIT W MP (Kit for conversion from fixed to withdrawable version) 066285
Connector 4th Pole SOR-PS-SOR 066415
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC for Withdrawable 066332
UVR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC for Withdrawable 066406
EXAMPLE 5: Rear mechanical interlock

The rear interlock is made up of the (horizontal) MIR-H or (vertical) MIR-V frame unit and the MIR-P
plates. To be able to receive the circuit-breakers directly mounted on the interlock plate, it is neces-
sary to specify:
− the sales code of the frame;
− the sales codes of the plates associated with the circuit-breakers/fixed parts which are to be
interlocked.
Horizontal mechanical interlock XT1 - XT2 in fixed version

1SDA…R1
Pos. 1 XT1B TMD 160-1600 A, 3p 066809
MIR-H - Horizontal mechanical interlock 066637
PLATE - XT1 Fixed 066639
Pos. 2 XT2N TMA 160-1600 A, 3p 067020
PLATE - XT2 Fixed 066641
7/3
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
XT1 160 TMD - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)

Thermomagnetic trip unit - 1SDA…R1
TMD Icu
(415V)
B C N S H
In I3 18kA 25kA 36kA 50kA 70kA
TMD 16 450 066799
TMD 20 450 066800
TMD 25 450 066801 067391
TMD 32 450 066802 067392 067411
TMD 40 450 066803 067393 067412
TMD 50 500 066804 067394 067413 067431 067449
XT1 circuit-breaker
TMD 63 630 066805 067395 067414 067432 067450
TMD 80 800 066806 067396 067415 067433 067451
TMD 100 1000 066807 067397 067416 067434 067452
TMD 125 1250 066808 067398 067417 067435 067453
TMD 160 1600 066809 067399 067418 067436 067454

TMD Icu
(415V)
B C N S H
TMD 16 450 066810
TMD 20 450 066811
TMD 25 450 066812 067400
TMD 32 450 066813 067401 067419
TMD 40 450 066814 067402 067420
TMD 50 500 066815 067403 067421 067439 067457
TMD 63 630 066816 067404 067422 067440 067458
TMD 80 800 066817 067405 067423 067441 067459
TMD 100 1000 066818 067406 067424 067442 067460
In N=50% 125 1250 066819 067407 067425 067443 067461
In N=50% 160 1600 066820 067408 067426 067444 067462
In N=100% 125 1250 066821 067409 067427 067445 067463
In N=100% 160 1600 066888 067410 067428 067446 067464
XT1D - Switch-disconnector
1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
XT1D 068208 068209
XT1D switch-disconnector
7/4
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Fixed Parts, conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts
Fixed part of plug-in (P)

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit P PF EF 068183 068185
Kit P PF HR/VR(1) 068184 068186
(1)
The terminals are factory-mounted in the horizontal position (HR)
Fixed part of plug-in
Terminals for the fixed parts

Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
EF - Front Extended terminals 066260 066261
R - Rear terminals HR/VR 066268 066269
PS - Rear phase separators 90mm 068953 068954
Conversion kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed into moving part of plug-in
Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
P MP KIT 066276 066277
Conversion kit for turning a fixed

circuit-breaker into the moving
part of a plug-in circuit-breaker
Adapter for mounting the terminals of the fixed circuit-breaker on the fixed part
Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
ADP adapter for fixed part (2 pieces) 066305 066306
Fixed part adapter
Service releases
Shunt Opening release -SOR-

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
SOR 12V DC 066313
SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066314
SOR uncabled SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066315
SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066316
SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066317
SOR 380-440V AC 066318
SOR 480-525V AC 066319
Cabled Version
SOR-C 12V DC 066321
SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066322
SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066323
SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066324
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325
SOR-C 380-440V AC 066326
SOR cabled
SOR-C 480-525V AC 066327
7/5
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Shunt Opening release with permanent operation -PS -SOR-

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
PS-SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066336
PS-SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066337
PS-SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066338
PS-SOR uncabled
PS-SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066339
PS-SOR 380-440V AC 066340
PS-SOR 480-525V AC 066341
Cabled Version
PS-SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066343
PS-SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066344
PS-SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066345
PS-SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066346
PS-SOR-C 380-440V AC 066347
PS-SOR-C 480-525V AC 066348
PS-SOR cabled
Undervoltage release -UVR-

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
UVR 24-30V AC/DC 066389
UVR 48V AC/DC 060964
UVR uncabled
UVR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066391
UVR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066392
UVR 380-440V AC 066393
UVR 480-525V AC 066394
Cabled Version
UVR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066396
UVR-C 48V AC/DC 060965
UVR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066398
UVR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066399
UVR cabled UVR-C 380-440V AC 066400
UVR-C 480-525V AC 066401
Delay device for undervoltage release -UVD-

Type 1SDA…R1
UVD 24...30V AC/DC 051357

UVD 48...60V AC/DC 051358
UVD 110...125V AC/DC 051360
UVD 220...250V AC/DC 051361
Time delay device for

7/6
1SDC210033D0201
Connectors
Socket Plug Connector on rear of panel

Type 1SDA…R1
Socket-plug panel connector with 3PINS 066409

Socket Plug Connector Socket-plug panel connector with 15PINS 066412
Electrical signals
Auxiliary Contacts -AUX-

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
AUX 250V AC 066422
AUX 24V DC 066423
AUX uncabled Cabled Version
AUX-C 3Q 250V Left 066426
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V 066431
AUX-C 2Q+1SY 250V 066433
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 24V DC 066446
AUX cabled
Auxiliary Position Contacts -AUP-

Type 1SDA…R1
Cabled Version
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 250V AC for plug-in circuit-breaker 066450
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 24V DC for plug-in circuit-breaker 066451
AUP - Auxiliary position

contacts
Early Auxiliary Contacts -AUE-

Type 1SDA…R1
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (Closed) 066454

AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (Open) 067118
AUE - Early auxiliary contacts
7/7
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Motor Operators
Motor Operator with direct action -MOD-

Type 1SDA…R1
MOD 24V DC 066457

MOD 48...60V DC 066458
MOD 110...125V AC/DC 066459
MOD 220...250V AC/DC 066460
MOD 380...440V AC 066461
Motor operator
MOD 480...525V AC 066462
Rotary Handle Operating Mechanisms
Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism

Type 1SDA…R1
RHD Normal Direct Handle 066475

RHD Direct Emergency Handle 066477
RHE Normal Transmitted Handle 066479
Direct rotary handle RHE Emergency Transmitted Handle 066481
RHS-L Normal left lateral handle 066579
RHS-L Large left lateral handle 066580
RHS-R Normal right lateral handle 066581
RHS-R Large right lateral handle 066582
Transmitted Handle Spare Parts
RHE_B Base for Transmitted Handle 066483
RHE_S Rod of 500mm 066576
RHE_H Normal Transmitted Handle 066577
RHE_H Emergency Transmitted Handle 066578
Transmitted rotary handle LH Normal large handle 066583
LH Large emergency handle 066585
IP54 Protection for transmitted rotary handle

Type 1SDA…R1
IP54 PROTECTION for transmitted handle -RHE- 066587
IP54
7/8
1SDC210033D0201
Locks
Padlock on the circuit-breaker

Type 1SDA…R1
PLL Removable lock with padlocks in open position 066588

PLL Fixed lock with padlocks in open position 066589
PLL Fixed lock with padlocks in open/closed position 066591
Fixed padlock
Key lock on the circuit-breaker

Type 1SDA…R1
KLC Ronis key lock open, different keys, removable in open position 066593
KLC Ronis key lock open, same Type A keys, removable in open position 066594
KLC Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys, removable in open position 066595
KLC Ronis key lock open, same Type C keys, removable in open position 066596
KLC Ronis key lock open, same Type D keys, removable in open position 066597
KLC Ronis key lock open, same keys, removable in both position 066598
Key lock on the handle

Type 1SDA…R1
RHL Ronis key lock open, different keys 066617

RHL Ronis key lock open, same Type A keys 066618
Key lock on the handle RHL Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066619
RHL Ronis key lock open, same Type C keys 066620
RHL Ronis key lock open, same Type D keys 066621
RHL Ronis key lock open/closed, different keys 066622
Key lock on the motor

Type 1SDA…R1
MOL-D Ronis key lock open, different keys 066623

MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type A keys 066624
Key lock on the motor MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066625
MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type C keys 066626
MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type D keys 066627
Mechanical interlock
Type 1SDA…R1
MIR-H 066637
MIR-V 066638
Plate XT1 F 066639
Plate XT1 P 066640
Interlock
Plate XT3 F 066643
Plate XT3 P 066644
Sealable Lock of Thermal Setting

Type 1SDA…R1
Lock on thermal setting for TMD trip unit 066651
7/9
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
RC Sel Low 200mm 067121
RC Inst 067122 067124
RC Sel 067123 067125
RC Inst / RC Sel
Panel type residual current relay

Type 1SDA...R1
RCQ020/A 115-230V AC 065979

RCQ020/A 415V AC 065980
Toroid closed Ø 60mm 037394
Installation
Bracket for fixing onto DIN rail

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
KIT DIN50022 066652 066652
DIN50022 KIT XT1+RC Low 200mm 067134
KIT DIN50022 XT1+RC Sel/RC Inst 067135 067135
DIN Guide
Terminals, terminal covers and phase separators
Insulating terminal covers

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
LTC Low terminal covers 066655 066656
HTC High terminal covers 066664 066665
Terminal covers
Sealable screws for terminal covers

Type 1SDA…R1
Kit (2 pcs) sealable screws 066672
Sealable screw
7/10
1SDC210033D0201
Phase separators
Type 1SDA…R1
4 pcs 6 pcs
PB Height 25mm 066674 066679
PS Height 100mm 066676 066681
PS Height 200mm 066678 066683
Phase separators
Terminals
Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs 6 pcs 8 pcs
F Front Terminals 066849 066850 066851 066852
EF Extended front terminals 066865 066866 066867 066868
EF Terminal
ES Extended spread front terminals 066889 066890 066891 066892
FC CuAl Terminals for CuAl cables 1x1.5...50mm2 067151 067152 067153 067154
FC CuAl Terminals for CuAl cables 1x35...95mm2 067155 067156 067157 067158
+ ADP
FC Cu Terminals for Cu cables 066905 066906 066907 066908
FCCuAl Terminal
MC Multi-cable Terminals 6x2.5...35mm2 066921 066922 066923 066924
R Rear Adjustable Terminals 066937 066938 066939 066940
R-RC Rear terminals for Residual current 066953 066954
FB Flexibar Terminals 066957 066958 066959 066960
Automatic transfer devices
ATS021- ATS022 Automatic transfer devices

Type 1SDA...R1
ATS021 065523
ATS022 065524
ATS021
Spare parts
Type 1SDA…R1
SA RC Sel / RC Inst - Opening solenoid of the residual current device 066990

AUX-C - Loose cabled auxiliary contact 250V(1) 066994
(1)
un-numbered cables
Flange for compartment door

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Small flange for circuit-breaker 068657 068657
Large flange for circuit-breaker 068639 068640
Flange
Flange MOD 068648 068648
Flange for direct handle RHD 068651 068651
Flange for residual current RC Sel / Inst 068653 068654
7/11
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
XT2 160 TMD/TMA - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMD 1.6 16 067000 067540 067584 067628 067672
TMD 2 20 067001 067541 067585 067629 067673
TMD 2.5 25 067002 067542 067586 067630 067674
TMD 3.2 32 067003 067543 067587 067631 067675
TMD 4 40 067004 067544 067588 067632 067676
TMD 5 50 067005 067545 067589 067633 067677
XT2 circuit-breaker TMD 6.3 63 067006 067546 067590 067634 067678
TMD 8 80 067007 067547 067591 067635 067679
TMD 10 100 067008 067548 067592 067636 067680
TMD 12.5 125 067009 067549 067593 067637 067681
TMD 16 300 067010 067550 067594 067638 067682
TMD 20 300 067011 067551 067595 067639 067683
TMD 25 300 067012 067552 067596 067640 067684
TMD 32 320 067013 067553 067597 067641 067685
TMA 40 400 067014 067554 067598 067642 067686
TMA 50 500 067015 067555 067599 067643 067687
TMA 63 630 067016 067556 067600 067644 067688
TMA 80 800 067017 067557 067601 067645 067689
TMA 100 1000 067018 067558 067602 067646 067690
TMA 125 1250 067019 067559 067603 067647 067691
TMA 160 1600 067020 067560 067604 067648 067692

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMD 1.6 16 067021 067561 067605 067649 067693
TMD 2 20 067022 067562 067606 067650 067694
TMD 2.5 25 067023 067563 067607 067651 067695
TMD 3.2 32 067024 067564 067608 067652 067696
TMD 4 40 067025 067565 067609 067653 067697
TMD 5 50 067026 067566 067610 067654 067698
TMD 6.3 63 067027 067567 067611 067655 067699
TMD 8 80 067028 067568 067612 067656 067700
TMD 10 100 067029 067569 067613 067657 067701
TMD 12.5 125 067030 067570 067614 067658 067702
TMD 16 300 067031 067571 067615 067659 067703
TMD 20 300 067032 067572 067616 067660 067704
TMD 25 300 067033 067573 067617 067661 067705
TMD 32 320 067034 067574 067618 067662 067706
TMA 40 400 067035 067575 067619 067663 067707
TMA 50 500 067036 067576 067620 067664 067708
TMA 63 630 067037 067577 067621 067665 067709
TMA 80 800 067038 067578 067622 067666 067710
TMA 100 1000 067039 067579 067623 067667 067711
TMA In N=50% 125 1250 067040 067580 067624 067668 067712
TMA In N=50% 160 1600 067041 067581 067625 067669 067713
TMA In N=100% 125 1250 067042 067582 067626 067670 067714
TMA In N=100% 160 1600 067043 067583 067627 067671 067715
7/12
1SDC210033D0201
XT2 160 TMG - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)
TMG Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMG 16 160 067716 067738
TMG 20 160 067717 067739
TMG 25 160 067718 067740
TMG 32 160 067719 067741
TMG 40 160 067720 067742
TMG 50 200 067721 067743
XT2 circuit-breaker TMG 63 200 067722 067744
TMG 80 240 067723 067745
TMG 100 300 067724 067746
TMG 125 375 067725 067747
TMG 160 480 067726 067748

TMG Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMG 16 160 067727 067749
TMG 20 160 067728 067750
TMG 25 160 067729 067751
TMG 32 160 067730 067752
TMG 40 160 067731 067753
TMG 50 200 067732 067754
TMG 63 200 067733 067755
TMG 80 240 067734 067756
TMG 100 300 067735 067757
TMG 125 375 067736 067758
TMG 160 480 067737 067759
XT2 160 MF/MA - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)

MF/MA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
MF 1 14 067044 067760 067770 067780 067790
MF 2 28 067045 067761 067771 067781 067791
MF 4 56 067046 067762 067772 067782 067792
MF 8.5 120 067047 067763 067773 067783 067793
MF 12.5 175 067048 067764 067774 067784 067794
MA 20 120…280 067049 067765 067775 067785 067795
MA 32 192…448 067050 067766 067776 067786 067796
MA 52 314…728 067051 067767 067777 067787 067797
MA 80 480…1120 067052 067768 067778 067788 067798
MA 100 600…1400 067053 067769 067779 067789 067799
7/13
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
XT2 160 Ekip LS/I - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)
Electronic trip unit - 1SDA…R1
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
In 36kA 50kA 70kA 120kA 150kA
Ekip LS/I 10 067054 067800 067857 067914 067971
Ekip LS/I 25 067055 067801 067858 067915 067972
Ekip LS/I 63 067056 067802 067859 067916 067973
Ekip LS/I 100 067057 067803 067860 067917 067974
Ekip LS/I 160 067058 067804 067861 067918 067975
XT2 circuit-breaker
XT2 160 Ekip I - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)

Ekip I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip I 10 067059 067805 067862 067919 067976
Ekip I 25 067060 067806 067863 067920 067977
Ekip I 63 067061 067807 067864 067921 067978
Ekip I 100 067062 067808 067865 067922 067979
Ekip I 160 067063 067809 067866 067923 067980
XT2 160 Ekip LSI - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)
Ekip LSI Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSI 10 067067 067810 067867 067924 067981
Ekip LSI 25 067068 067811 067868 067925 067982
Ekip LSI 63 067069 067812 067869 067926 067983
Ekip LSI 100 067070 067813 067870 067927 067984
Ekip LSI 160 067071 067814 067871 067928 067985
XT2 160 Ekip LSIG - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 10 067072 067815 067872 067929 067986
Ekip LSIG 25 067073 067816 067873 067930 067987
Ekip LSIG 63 067074 067817 067874 067931 067988
Ekip LSIG 100 067075 067818 067875 067932 067989
Ekip LSIG 160 067076 067819 067876 067933 067990
XT2 160 Ekip M-I - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)
Ekip M-I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip M-I 20 067086 067829 067886 067943 068000
Ekip M-I 32 067087 067830 067887 067944 068001
Ekip M-I 52 067088 067831 067888 067945 068002
Ekip M-I 100 067089 067832 067889 067946 068003
7/14
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LS/I 10 067090 067833 067890 067947 068004
Ekip LS/I 25 067091 067834 067891 067948 068005
Ekip LS/I 63 067092 067835 067892 067949 068006
Ekip LS/I 100 067093 067836 067893 067950 068007
Ekip LS/I 160 067095 067838 067895 067952 068009
XT2 circuit-breaker

Ekip I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip I 10 067096 067839 067896 067953 068010
Ekip I 25 067097 067840 067897 067954 068011
Ekip I 63 067098 067841 067898 067955 068012
Ekip I 100 067099 067842 067899 067956 068013
Ekip I 160 067101 067844 067901 067958 068015
Ekip LSI Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSI 10 067102 067845 067902 067959 068016
Ekip LSI 25 067103 067846 067903 067960 068017
Ekip LSI 63 067104 067847 067904 067961 068018
Ekip LSI 100 067105 067848 067905 067962 068019
Ekip LSI 160 067107 067850 067907 067964 068021
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 10 067108 067851 067908 067965 068022
Ekip LSIG 25 067109 067852 067909 067966 068023
Ekip LSIG 63 067110 067853 067910 067967 068024
Ekip LSIG 100 067111 067854 067911 067968 068025
Ekip LSIG 160 067113 067856 067913 067970 068027
7/15
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
XT2 160 - Breaking part

1SDA…R1
N S H L V
3 poles 068163 068164 068165 068166 068167
4 poles 068168 068169 068170 068171 068172
Loose trip units XT2

Thermomagnetic - TMA/TMD 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In I3
TMD 16 300 067226 067247
Loose trip unit TMD 20 300 067227 067248
TMD 25 300 067228 067249
TMD 32 320 067229 067250
TMA 40 400 067230 067251
TMA 50 500 067231 067252
TMA 63 630 067232 067253
TMA 80 800 067233 067254
TMA 100 1000 067234 067255
TMA 125 1250 067235 067258
TMA 160 1600 067236 067259
TMA In N=50% 125 1250 067256
TMA In N=50% 160 1600 067257

Thermomagnetic - TMG 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In I3
TMG 80 240 067267 067278
TMG 100 300 067268 067279
TMG 125 375 067269 067280
TMG 160 480 067270 067283

Thermomagnetic - MA 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In I3
MA 20 120...280 067290
MA 32 192...448 067291
MA 52 314...728 067292
MA 80 480...1120 067293
MA 100 600...1400 067294
7/16
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic - Ekip LS/I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LS/I 25 067296 067329
Loose trip unit Ekip LS/I 63 067297 067330
Ekip LS/I 100 067298 067331
Ekip LS/I 160 067299 067333

Electronic - Ekip I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip I 25 067301 067335
Ekip I 63 067302 067336
Ekip I 100 067303 067337
Ekip I 160 067304 067339

Electronic - Ekip LSI 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LSI 25 067306 067341
Ekip LSI 63 067307 067342
Ekip LSI 100 067308 067343
Ekip LSI 160 067309 067345

Electronic - Ekip LSIG 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LSIG 25 067311 067347
Ekip LSIG 63 067312 067348
Ekip LSIG 100 067313 068052
Ekip LSIG 160 067314 067350
Loose releases XT2

Electronic - Ekip M-I 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In
Ekip M-I 20 067324
Ekip M-I 32 067325
Ekip M-I 52 067326
Ekip M-I 100 067327
7/17
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers

Electronic - Ekip M-LIU 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In
Ekip M-LIU 25 067352
Loose trip unit Ekip M-LIU 63 067353
Ekip M-LIU 100 067354

Electronic - Ekip M-LRIU 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In
Ekip M-LRIU 25 067357

Electronic - Ekip G-LS/I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip G-LS/I 25 067362 067368
Ekip G-LS/I 63 067363 067369
Ekip G-LS/I 100 067364 067370
Ekip G-LS/I 160 067365 067372

Electronic - Ekip N-LS/I 1SDA…R1
4 poles
In
Ekip N-LS/I 63 067375
Ekip N-LS/I 100 067376
7/18
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Fixed parts, conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit P PF EF 068187 068190
Kit P PF HR/VR(1) 068188 068191
(1)
Fixed part of withdrawable (W)

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit W PF EF 068200 068202
Kit W PF HR/VR(1) 068201 068203
(1)
Fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
EF - Front Extended Terminals 066262 066263
R - Rear Terminals HR/VR 066270 066271
Conversion Kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed to the moving part of plug-in
Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
P MP KIT 066278 066279

circuit-breaker into the moving part
of a plug-in circuit-breaker
Conversion Kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed to the moving part of withdrawable
Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
W MP KIT 066284 066285

of a withdrawable circuit-breaker
Conversion Kit of the fixed part from plug-in to withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
FP P>W KIT 066288
Conversion Kit of RC Sel from Fixed to Plug-in

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
P MP RC Sel 4p KIT 066290
7/19
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Conversion Kit of RC Sel from plug-in to withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
W MP RC Sel 4p KIT 066292
Key lock for fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
KL-D Key Lock FP, different keys 066293

KL-S Key Lock FP, same keys N.20005 066294
Key lock/Padlock for fixed part
Ronis key lock for fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
KL-D Ronis FP key lock, different keys 066298

KL-S Ronis FP key lock, same Type A keys 066300
Ronis key lock/Padlock

for fixed part
Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
ADP Adapter fixed part (2 pieces) 066307 066308
Fixed part adapter
Service releases
Shunt opening release -SOR-

Type 1SDA…R1
Fixed/Plug-in Withdrawable
Uncabled Version
SOR uncabled SOR 12V DC 066313
SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066314
SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066315
SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066316
SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066317
SOR 380-440V AC 066318
SOR 480-525V AC 066319
Cabled Version
SOR-C 12V DC 066321 066328
SOR cabled SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066322 066329
SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066323 066330
SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066324 066331
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325 066332
SOR-C 380-440V AC 066326 066333
SOR-C 480-525V AC 066327 066334
SOR for withdrawable
7/20
1SDC210033D0201
Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
PS-SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066336
PS-SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066337
PS-SOR uncabled PS-SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066338
PS-SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066339
PS-SOR 380-440V AC 066340
PS-SOR 480-525V AC 066341
Cabled Version
PS-SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066343 066350
PS-SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066344 066351
PS-SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066345 066352
PS-SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066346 066354
PS-SOR cabled
PS-SOR-C 380-440V AC 066347 066355
PS-SOR-C 480-525V AC 066348 066356
PS-SOR for withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
UVR 24-30V AC/DC 066389
UVR uncabled
UVR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066391
UVR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066392
UVR 380-440V AC 066393
UVR 480-525V AC 066394
Cabled Version
UVR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066396 066403
UVR-C 48V AC/DC 069065 069066
UVR cabled UVR-C 60V AC/DC 066397 066404
UVR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066398 066405
UVR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066399 066406
UVR-C 380-440V AC 066400 066407
UVR-C 480-525V AC 066401 066408
UVR for withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
UVD 24...30V AC/DC 051357

UVD 48...60V AC/DC 051358
UVD 110...125V AC/DC 051360
UVD 220...250V AC/DC 051361

7/21
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Connectors
Connector of fourth pole for Withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1

Connector 4th Pole UVR 066418
Socket-Plug Connector on rear of panel

Type 1SDA…R1

Socket-plug panel connector Socket-plug panel connector with 9PINS 066411
Fixed part socket-plug connector

Type 1SDA...R1
Socket-plug connector of Moving Part 12PINS 066413

Socket-plug connector of Fixed Part 12PINS 066414
Fixed part socket-plug

connector
Electrical signals

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
AUX 24V DC 066423
AUX-SA 24V DC 066425
AUX uncabled AUX 250V AC 066422
AUX-SA 250V AC 066424
Cabled Version
AUX-SA-C 24V DC 067116 067117
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 24V DC 066446 066447
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 24V DC 066448 066449
AUX-SA-C 250V AC 066429 066430
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V AC 066431 066432
AUX-C 2Q+1SY 250V AC 066433
AUX cabled AUX-C 2Q+2SY+1SA 250V AC 066438 066439

AUX-C 3Q 250V AC Left 066427
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 250V AC 066434 066435
AUX-C 3Q+2SY 250V AC 066436 066437
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 400V AC 066444 066445
AUX-C 2Q 400V AC 066440 066443
AUX for withdrawable
7/22
1SDC210033D0201
Auxiliary Position Contacts -AUP-
Type 1SDA…R1
Cabled Version
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 250V AC for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 066450
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 24V DC for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 066451
AUP-R – Two Racked-out contacts 250V AC for withdrawable circuit-breaker 066452
AUP-R – Two Racked-out contacts 24V DC for withdrawable circuit-breaker 066453
AUP - Auxiliary position contacts
Early Auxiliary Contacts -AUE-

Type 1SDA…R1
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (Open) 067118 067119
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (Close) 066454 066455
AUE – Two contacts in the circuit-breaker (Open/Close) 066456
Motor Operators
Stored energy Motor Operator MOE

Type 1SDA…R1
MOE 24V DC 066463

MOE 48...60V DC 066464
MOE 110...125V AC/DC 066465
MOE 220...250V AC/DC 066466
MOE - Motor operator MOE 380...440V AC 066467
MOE 480...525V AC 066468
Electronic stored energy motor operator MOE-E

Type 1SDA…R1
MOE-E 24V DC 066469

MOE-E 48...60V DC 066470
MOE-E 110...125V AC/DC 066471
MOE-E 220...250V AC/DC 066472
MOE-E - Electronic motor operator MOE-E 380...440V AC 066473
MOE-E 480...525V AC 066474
7/23
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Rotary Handles
Type 1SDA…R1
RHD Normal Direct Handle 069053 066476
RHD Direct Emergency Handle 069054 066478
RHE Normal Transmitted Handle 069055 066480
Direct handle RHE Emergency Transmitted Handle 069056 066482

RHS L Normal Left Lateral Handle 069058
RHS L Emergency Left Lateral Handle 069059
RHS R Normal Right Lateral Handle 069060
RHS R Emergency Right Lateral Handle 069061
RHE_B Base for Transmitted Handle 069057 066484
Transmitted handle LH Wide Normal Handle 066583
LH Wide Emergency Handle 066585

Type 1SDA…R1
IP54 protection for transmitted handle -RHE- 066587
IP54
Locks
Lock and Padlocks on the circuit-breaker

Type 1SDA…R1
Lateral handle
Fixed padlock
7/24
1SDC210033D0201
Type 1SDA…R1

Type 1SDA…R1

RHL Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066619

Type 1SDA…R1

Key lock on the motor MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066631
MOL-M Key lock against manual operation 066634
Front for FLD locks

Type 1SDA…R1
Front for FLD locks 066635 066636
Front for locks
Type 1SDA…R1
MIR-H 066637
MIR-V 066638
Plate XT2 F 066641
Plate XT2 P/W 066642
Interlock
Plate XT4 F 066645
7/25
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
RC Sel 067126
RC Sel

Type 1SDA...R1
RCQ020/A 115-230V AC 065979

RCQ020/A 415V AC 065980
Installation

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
DIN50022 KIT 066653 066653
DIN guide
Terminals, terminal cover and phase separators

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Terminal cover

Type 1SDA…R1
Kit with two sealable screws 066672
Sealable screw
Phase separators
Type 1SDA…R1
4 pcs 6 pcs
PB Height 25mm 069062 069063
PB Height 100mm 066675 066680
PB Height 200mm 066677 066682
Phase separators
7/26
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals
Type 1SDA…R1
EF Extetnded front terminals 066869 066870 066871 066872
EF Terminal
FC CuAl Terminals for CuAl cables 1x150…240mm2 067171 067172 067173 067174
+ ADP
FCCuAl Terminal
FC Cu Terminali for Cu cables 066909 066910 066911 066912
R Rear adjustable Terminals 066941 066942 066943 066944
Type 1SDA…R1
Ekip Display 068659 068659
Ekip LED Meter 068660 068660
Ekip Com 068661 068662
Ekip Display PR212/CI Contactor control unit 050708 050708
EP010 Interface module 059469 059469
HMI030 Interface on front of panel 063143 063143
Ekip LED Meter CT External neutral

Type 1SDA…R1
CT External neutral of 10A 067211

Connection Kit
Type 1SDA…R1
Kit of 24V DC auxiliary voltage for electronic trip units 066980 066981
Kit for PTC Connection 066982 066983
Kit for external neutral Connection 066984 066985
Kit for PR212/CI Connection 066986 066987
Test and Configuration Unit

Type 1SDA…R1
Ekip TT Trip Test Unit 066988

Ekip T&P Programming and test Unit 066989
Ekip T&P unit
7/27
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA...R1
ATS021 065523
ATS022 065524
ATS021
Spare parts
Type 1SDA…R1
SA RC Sel - Opening solenoid of the residual current 066991 066993
device
AUX-C -Loose cabled Auxiliary Contact 250V AC(1) 066994 066995
AUX-C -Loose cabled Auxiliary Contact 24V DC(1) 066996 066997
(1)
un-numbered cables
Fixed Part Connector for Withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
1 connector for fixed part/moving part of withdrawable with 2 PINS for SOR/UVR up to 400V 067213
1 connector for fixed part/moving part of withdrawable with 3 PINS for AUX up to 400V 067214
Fixed/Moving part connector

for withdrawable
Flange for Compartment door

Type 1SDA...R1
Fixed/ Fixed/ With- With-
Plug-in Plug-in drawable drawable
Flange Large flange for circuit-breaker 068641 068642
Flange for MOE/MOE-E/FLD 068649 068649 068650 068650
Flange for direct handle RHD 068651 068651 068652 068652
Flange for residual current RC Sel 066647 066648
7/28
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers

TMD Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMD 63 630 068053 068215
TMD 80 800 068054 068216
TMD 100 1000 068055 068217
TMD 125 1250 068056 068218
TMD 160 1600 068057 068219
TMD 200 2000 068058 068220
XT3 circuit-breaker
TMD 250 2500 068059 068221

TMD Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMD 63 630 068060 068222
TMD 80 800 068061 068223
TMD 100 1000 068062 068224
In N=50% 125 1250 068063 068225
In N=50% 160 1600 068064 068226
In N=50% 200 2000 068065 068227
In N=50% 250 2500 068066 068228
In N=100% 125 1250 068067 068229
In N=100% 160 1600 068068 068230
In N=100% 200 2000 068069 068231
In N=100% 250 2500 068070 068232

TMG Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMG 63 400 068251 068265
TMG 80 400 068252 068266
TMG 100 400 068253 068267
TMG 125 400 068254 068268
TMG 160 480 068255 068269
TMG 200 600 068256 068270
TMG 250 750 068257 068271

TMG Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
TMG 63 400 068258 068272
TMG 80 400 068259 068273
TMG 100 400 068260 068274
TMG 125 400 068261 068275
TMG 160 480 068262 068276
TMG 200 600 068263 068277
TMG 250 750 068264 068278
7/29
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
XT3 250 MA - Fixed (F) - 3 poles - Front terminals (F)

MA Icu
(415V)
N S
In I3 36kA 50kA
MA 100 600...1200 068071 068279
MA 125 750...1500 068072 068280
MA 160 960...1920 068073 068281
MA 200 1200...2400 068074 068282
XT3 circuit-breaker
XT3D - Switch-disconnector
1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
XT3D 068210 068211
7/30
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit P PF EF 068192 068194
Kit P PF HR/VR(1) 068193 068195
(1)
Fixed part of plug-in Terminals for the fixed parts

Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
Conversion Kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed into moving part of plug-in
Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
P MP KIT 066280 066281

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
ADP adapter fixed part (2 pieces) 066309 066310
Fixed part adapter
Service releases

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
SOR 12V DC 066313
SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066314
SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066315
SOR uncabled SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066316

SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066317
SOR 380-440V AC 066318
SOR 480-525V AC 066319
Cabled Version
SOR-C 12V DC 066321
SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066322
SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066323
SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066324
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325
SOR-C 380-440V AC 066326
SOR cabled SOR-C 480-525V AC 066327
7/31
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
PS-SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066336
PS-SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066337
PS-SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066338
PS-SOR uncabled
PS-SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066339
PS-SOR 380-440V AC 066340
PS-SOR 480-525V AC 066341
Cabled Version
PS-SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066343
PS-SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066344
PS-SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066345
PS-SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066346
PS-SOR-C 380-440V AC 066347
PS-SOR-C 480-525V AC 066348
PS-SOR cabled

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
UVR 24-30V AC/DC 066389
UVR uncabled
UVR 110...127V AC - 110...125V DC 066391
UVR 220...240V AC - 220...250V DC 066392
UVR 380-440V AC 066393
UVR 480-525V AC 066394
Cabled Version
UVR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066396
UVR-C 110-127V AC - 110-125V DC 066398
UVR-C 220-240V AC - 220-250V DC 066399
UVR cabled
UVR-C 380-440V AC 066400
UVR-C 480-525V AC 066401

Type 1SDA…R1
UVD 24...30V AC/DC 051357

UVD 48...60V AC/DC 051358
UVD 110...125V AC/DC 051360
UVD 220...250V AC/DC 051361

7/32
1SDC210033D0201
Connectors
Socket Plug Connector on rear of panel

Type 1SDA…R1

Socket-plug panel connector
Electrical signals

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
AUX 24V DC 066423
AUX 250V AC 066422
AUX uncabled Cabled Version
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 24V DC 066446
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 24V AC 066448
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V AC 066431
AUX-C 2Q+1SY 250V AC 066433
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 250V AC 066434
AUX cabled
Auxiliary position contacts -AUP-

Type 1SDA…R1
Cabled Version
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 250V AC for plug-in circuit-breaker 066450
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 24V DC for plug-in circuit-breaker 066451

contacts
Early auxiliary contacts -AUE-

Type 1SDA…R1
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (closed) 066454

AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (open) 067118
7/33
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Motor Operators
Motor operator with direct action -MOD-

Type 1SDA…R1
MOD 24V DC 066457

MOD 48...60V DC 066458
MOD 110...125V AC/DC 066459
MOD 220...250V AC/DC 066460
MOD 380...440V AC 066461
Motor operator
MOD 480...525V AC 066462
Rotary Handles
Type 1SDA…R1

RHD Normal Direct Handle 066475
RHD Direct Emergency Handle 066477
RHE Normal Transmitted Handle 066479
Rotary Handles
RHE Emergency Transmitted Handle 066481
RHS-L Normal left lateral handle 066579
RHS-L Large left lateral handle 066580
RHS-R Normal right lateral handle 066581
RHS-R Large right lateral handle 066582
RHE_B Base for Transmitted Handle 066483
Transmitted rotary handle LH Normal large handle 066583
LH Large emergency handle 066585

Type 1SDA…R1
IP54 Protection for transmitted handle -RHE- 066587
IP54
7/34
1SDC210033D0201
Locks

Type 1SDA…R1
PLL Removable lock with padlocks in open position 066588

Fixed padlock

Type 1SDA…R1

Type 1SDA…R1


Type 1SDA…R1

MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066625
Type 1SDA…R1
MIR-H 066637
MIR-V 066638
Plate XT1 F 066639
Plate XT1 P 066640
Interlock
Plate XT3 F 066643
Plate XT3 P 066644
Sealable Lock of Thermal Setting

Type 1SDA…R1
Lock on thermal setting for TMD trip unit 066651
7/35
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
RC Inst 067127 067129
RC Sel 067128 067130
RC B Type 067132
RC Inst / RC Sel Panel type residual current relay

Type 1SDA...R1
RCQ020/A 115-230V AC 065979

RCQ020/A 415V AC 065980
Installation

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
DIN50022 KIT 066652 066652
DIN50022 XT3+RC Inst / RC Sel 067139 067139
DIN Guide
Terminals, terminal covers, phase separators

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Terminal covers

Type 1SDA…R1
Kit (2 pcs) sealable screws 066672
Sealable screw
Phase separators
Type 1SDA…R1
4 pcs 6 pcs
PB Height 25mm
PB Height100mm 066676 066681
PB Height 200mm 066678 066683
Phase separators
7/36
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals
Type 1SDA…R1
EF Extetnded front terminals 066873 066874 066875 066876
EF Terminal
FC CuAl terminals for CuAl cables 1x70...185mm2 067179 067180 067181 067182
+ ADP
FC Cu terminali for Cu cables 066913 066914 066915 066916
FCCuAl Terminal
R Rear adjustable terminals 066945 066946 066947 066948

Type 1SDA...R1
ATS021 065523
ATS022 065524
ATS021
Spare parts
Type 1SDA…R1
SA RC Sel/RC Inst/RC B Type - Opening solenoid of the residual current device 066992
SA RC B Type - Opening solenoid of the residual current device 067208
AUX-C - Loose uncabled Auxiliary Contact 250V(1) 066994
(1)
un-numbered cables

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Small flange for Circuit-breaker 068657 068657
Large flange for Circuit-breaker 068644 068645
Flange
Flange for MOD 068648 068648
Flange for direct handle RHD 068651 068651
Flange for residual current RC Sel/RC Inst 068655 068656
7/37
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMD 16 300 068076 068299 068332 068365 068398
TMD 20 300 068080 068300 068333 068366 068399
TMD 25 300 068081 068301 068334 068367 068400
TMD 32 320 068082 068302 068335 068368 068401
TMA 40 400 068083 068303 068336 068369 068402
TMA 50 500 068084 068304 068337 068370 068403
XT4 circuit-breaker TMA 63 630 068085 068305 068338 068371 068404

TMA 80 800 068086 068306 068339 068372 068405
TMA 100 1000 068087 068307 068340 068373 068406
TMA 125 1250 068088 068308 068341 068374 068407
TMA 160 1600 068089 068309 068342 068375 068408

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMA 200 2000 068090 068310 068343 068376 068409
TMA 225 2250 068091 068311 068344 068377 068410
TMA 250 2500 068092 068312 068345 068378 068411

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMD 16 300 068093 068313 068346 068379 068412
TMD 20 300 068094 068314 068347 068380 068413
TMD 25 300 068095 068315 068348 068381 068414
TMD 32 320 068096 068316 068349 068382 068415
TMA 40 400 068097 068317 068350 068383 068416
TMA 50 500 068098 068318 068351 068384 068417
TMA 63 630 068099 068319 068352 068385 068418
TMA 80 800 068100 068320 068353 068386 068419
TMA 100 1000 068101 068321 068354 068387 068420
TMA In N=50% 125 1250 068102 068322 068355 068388 068421
TMA In N=50% 160 1600 068103 068323 068356 068389 068422
TMA In N=50% 200 2000 068104 068324 068357 068390 068423
TMA In N=50% 225 2250 068105 068325 068358 068391 068424
TMA In N=50% 250 2500 068106 068326 068359 068392 068425
TMA In N=100% 125 1250 068107 068327 068360 068393 068426
TMA In N=100% 160 1600 068108 068328 068361 068394 068427

TMD/TMA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
TMA In N=100% 200 2000 068109 068329 068362 068395 068428
TMA In N=100% 225 2250 068110 068330 068363 068396 068429
TMA In N=100% 250 2500 068111 068331 068364 068397 068430
7/38
1SDC210033D0201
MA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
MA 10(1) 50...100 068112 068431 068441 068451 068461
MA 12.5(1) 62.5...125 068113 068432 068442 068452 068462
MA 20 100...200 068114 068433 068443 068453 068463
MA 32 160...320 068115 068434 068444 068454 068464
MA 52 260...520 068116 068435 068445 068455 068465
MA 80 400...800 068117 068436 068446 068456 068466
MA 100 500...1000 068118 068437 068447 068457 068467
XT4 circuit-breaker
MA 125 625...1250 068119 068438 068448 068458 068468
MA 160 800...1600 068120 068439 068449 068459 068469
(1)
Available stortly, please ask ABB SACE

MA Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
MA 200 1000...2000 068121 068440 068450 068460 068470
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LS/I 40 068122 068471 068511 068551 068591
Ekip LS/I 63 068123 068472 068512 068552 068592
Ekip LS/I 100 068124 068473 068513 068553 068593
Ekip LS/I 160 068125 068474 068514 068554 068594
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LS/I 250 068126 068475 068515 068555 068595

Ekip I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip I 40 068127 068476 068516 068556 068596
Ekip I 63 068128 068477 068517 068557 068597
Ekip I 100 068129 068478 068518 068558 068598
Ekip I 160 068130 068479 068519 068559 068599

Ekip I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip I 250 068131 068480 068520 068560 068600
7/39
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers
Ekip LSI Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSI 40 068132 068481 068521 068561 068601
Ekip LSI 63 068133 068482 068522 068562 068602
Ekip LSI 100 068134 068483 068523 068563 068603
Ekip LSI 160 068135 068484 068524 068564 068604
XT4 circuit-breaker Icu
Ekip LSI N S H L V
(415V)
Ekip LSI 250 068136 068485 068525 068565 068605
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 40 068137 068486 068526 068566 068606
Ekip LSIG 63 068138 068487 068527 068567 068607
Ekip LSIG 100 068139 068488 068528 068568 068608
Ekip LSIG 160 068140 068489 068529 068569 068609
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 250 068141 068490 068530 068570 068610
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LS/I 40 068142 068491 068531 068571 068611
Ekip LS/I 63 068144 068492 068532 068572 068612
Ekip LS/I 100 068145 068493 068533 068573 068613
Ekip LS/I 160 068146 068494 068534 068574 068614
Ekip LS/I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LS/I 250 068147 068495 068535 068575 068615
7/40
1SDC210033D0201
Ekip I Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip I 40 068148 068496 068536 068576 068616
Ekip I 63 068149 068497 068537 068577 068617
Ekip I 100 068150 068498 068538 068578 068618
Ekip I 160 068151 068499 068539 068579 068619

XT4 circuit-breaker Icu
Ekip I N S H L V
(415V)
Ekip I 250 068152 068500 068540 068580 068620
Ekip LSI Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSI 40 068153 068501 068541 068581 068621
Ekip LSI 63 068154 068502 068542 068582 068622
Ekip LSI 100 068155 068503 068543 068583 068623
Ekip LSI 160 068156 068504 068544 068584 068624
Ekip LSI Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSI 250 068157 068505 068545 068585 068625
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 40 068158 068506 068546 068586 068626
Ekip LSIG 63 068159 068507 068547 068587 068627
Ekip LSIG 100 068160 068508 068548 068588 068628
Ekip LSIG 160 068161 068509 068549 068589 068629
Ekip LSIG Icu
(415V)
N S H L V
Ekip LSIG 250 068162 068510 068550 068590 068630
XT4 D - Switch-disconnector
1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
20kA 20kA
XT4 D 068212 068213
7/41
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers

1SDA…R1
N S H L V
3 poles 068289 068290 068291 068292 068293
4 poles 068294 068295 068296 068297 068298

1SDA…R1
N S H L V
3 poles 068173 068174 068175 068176 068177
4 poles 068178 068179 068180 068181 068182

Thermomagnetic - TMD/TMA 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In I3
TMD 16 300 067377 067465
Loose trip units TMD 20 300 067378 067468
TMD 25 300 067379 067469
TMD 32 320 067380 067470
TMA 40 400 067381 067471
TMA 50 500 067382 067472
TMA 63 630 067383 067473
TMA 80 800 067384 067474
TMA 100 1000 067385 067475
TMA 125 1250 067386 067481
TMA 160 1600 067387 067482
TMA 200 2000 067388 067483
TMA 225 2250 067389 067484
TMA 250 2500 067390 067485
TMA In N=50% 125 1250 067476
TMA In N=50% 160 1600 067477
TMA In N=50% 200 2000 067478
TMA In N=50% 225 2250 067479
TMA In N=50% 250 2500 067480

Thermomagnetic - MA 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In I3
MA 20 100...200 067490
MA 32 160...320 067491
MA 52 260...520 067492
MA 80 400...800 067493
MA 100 500...1000 067494
MA 125 625...1250 067495
MA 160 800...1600 067496
MA 200 1000...2000 067497
7/42
1SDC210033D0201
Electronic - Ekip LS/I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LS/I 40 067498 067518
Loose trip units Ekip LS/I 63 067499 067519
Ekip LS/I 100 067500 067520
Ekip LS/I 160 067501 067521
Ekip LS/I 250 067502 067522

Electronic - Ekip I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip I 40 067503 067523
Ekip I 63 067504 067524
Ekip I 100 067505 067525
Ekip I 160 067506 067526
Ekip I 250 067507 067527

Electronic - Ekip LSI 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LSI 40 067508 067528
Ekip LSI 63 067509 067529
Ekip LSI 100 067510 067530
Ekip LSI 160 067511 067531
Ekip LSI 250 067512 067532

Electronic - Ekip LSIG 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip LSIG 40 067513 067533
Ekip LSIG 63 067514 067534
Ekip LSIG 100 067515 067535
Ekip LSIG 160 067516 067536
Ekip LSIG 250 067517 067537
7/43
1SDC210033D0201
Circuit-breakers

Electronic - Ekip M-LIU 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In
Ekip M-LIU 40 068028
Loose trip units Ekip M-LIU 63 068029
Ekip M-LIU 100 068030
Ekip M-LIU 160 068031

Electronic - Ekip M-LRIU 1SDA…R1
3 poles
In

Electronic - Ekip G-LS/I 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
In
Ekip G-LS/I 40 068038 068043
Ekip G-LS/I 63 068039 068044
Ekip G-LS/I 100 068040 068045
Ekip G-LS/I 160 068041 068046
Ekip G-LS/I 250 068042 068047

Electronic - Ekip N LS/I 1SDA…R1
4 poles
In
Ekip N LS/I 40 068048
Ekip N LS/I 63 068049
Ekip N LS/I 100 068050
Ekip N LS/I 160 068051
7/44
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit P PF EF 068196 068198
Kit P PF HR/VR(1) 068197 068199
(1)
Fixed part of withdrawable (W)

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit W PF EF 068204 068206
Kit W PF HR/VR(1) 068205 068207
(1)
Fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
Conversion Kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed into moving part of plug-in
Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
P MP KIT 066282 066283

Conversion Kit of the circuit-breaker from fixed into moving part of withdrawable
Type 1SDA…R1
3 pcs 4 pcs
W MP KIT 066286 066287

of a withdrawable circuit-breaker
Conversion Kit of the fixed part from plug-in to withdrawable
Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
FP P>W KIT 066289
Conversion Kit of RC from fixed to plug-in

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
P MP RC Sel XT2 4p KIT 066291
7/45
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Conversion Kit of RC from plug-in to withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
W MP RC Sel KIT 067115
Key lock/padlock for fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
KL-D Key Lock FP, different keys 066293

KL-S Key Lock FP, same keys N.20005 066294
Key lock/padlock for fixed part
Ronis key/padlock lock for fixed part of withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
KL-D Ronis FP key lock, different keys 066298

KL-S Ronis FP key lock, same Type A keys 066300
Ronis key lock/padlock

for fixed part
Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
ADP adapter fixed part (2 pieces) 066311 066312
Fixed part adapter
Service releases

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
SOR 12V DC 066313
SOR uncabled SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066314
SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066315
SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066316
SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066317
SOR 380-440V AC 066318
SOR 480-525V AC 066319
Cabled Version
SOR-C 12V DC 066321 066328
SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066322 066329
SOR cabled
SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066323 066330
SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066324 066331
SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066325 066332
SOR-C 380-440V AC 066326 066333
SOR-C 480-525V AC 066327 066334
7/46
1SDC210033D0201
Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
PS-SOR 24-30V AC/DC 066336
PS-SOR 48-60V AC/DC 066337
PS-SOR uncabled PS-SOR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066338
PS-SOR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066339
PS-SOR 380-440V AC 066340
PS-SOR 480-525V AC 066341
Cabled Version
PS-SOR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066343 066350
PS-SOR-C 48-60V AC/DC 066344 066351
PS-SOR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066345 066352
PS-SOR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066346 066354
PS-SOR cabled
PS-SOR-C 380-440V AC 066347 066355
PS-SOR-C 480-525V AC 066348 066356
PS-SOR for withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
UVR 24-30V AC/DC 066389
UVR uncabled UVR 48V AC/DC 069064
UVR 110...127V AC / 110...125V DC 066391
UVR 220...240V AC / 220...250V DC 066392
UVR 380-440V AC 066393
UVR 480-525V AC 066394
Cabled Version
UVR-C 24-30V AC/DC 066396 066403
UVR-C 48V AC/DC 069065 060966
UVR cabled UVR-C 60V AC/DC 066397 066404
UVR-C 110-127V AC / 110-125V DC 066398 066405
UVR-C 220-240V AC / 220-250V DC 066399 066406
UVR-C 380-440V AC 066400 066407
UVR-C 480-525V AC 066401 066408

Type 1SDA…R1
UVD 24...30V AC/DC 051357

UVD 48...60V AC/DC 051358
UVD 110...125V AC/DC 051360
UVD 220...250V AC/DC 051361

7/47
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Connectors
Connector of fourth pole for withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
Withdrawable
Connector 4th Pole UVR 066418
Socket-Plug connector on rear of panel

Type 1SDA…R1
Withdrawable
Socket-plug panel connector Socket-plug panel connector with 9PINS 066411
Fixed part socket-plug connector

Type 1SDA...R1
Socket-plug connector of Moving Part 12PINS 066413

Socket-plug connector of Fixed Part 12PINS 066414
Socket-plug connector
of fixed part
Electrical signals
Auxiliary contacts -AUX-

Type 1SDA…R1
Uncabled Version
AUX 24V DC 066423
AUX-SA 24V DC 066425
AUX 250V AC 066422
AUX uncabled
AUX-SA 250V AC 066424
Cabled Version
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 24V DC 066446 066447
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 24V DC 066448 066449
AUX-SA-C 24V DC 067116 067117
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 250V AC 066431 066432
AUX-C 2Q+1SY 250V AC 066433
AUX-C 2Q+2SY+1SY 250V AC 066438 066439
AUX-C 3Q+1SY 250V AC 066434 066435
AUX cabled
AUX-C 3Q+2SY 250V AC 066436 066437
AUX-SA-C 250V AC 066429 066430
AUX-C 1Q+1SY 400V AC 066444 066445
AUX-C 2Q 400V AC 066440 066443
AUX for withdrawable
7/48
1SDC210033D0201
Auxiliary position contacts -AUP-
Type 1SDA…R1
Cabled Version
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 250V AC for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 066450
AUP-I – Four Racked-in contacts 24V DC for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 066451
AUP-R – Two Racked-out contacts 250V AC for withdrawable circuit-breaker 066452
AUP-R – Two Racked-out contacts 24V DC for withdrawable circuit-breaker 066453

contacts
Early auxiliary contacts -AUE-

Type 1SDA…R1
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (open) 067118 067119
AUE – Two contacts in the rotary handle RHx (closed) 066454 066455
AUE – Two contacts in the circuit-breaker (open/closed) 066456
Motor Operators
Stored energy motor operator MOE

Type 1SDA…R1
MOE 24V DC 066463

MOE 48...60V DC 066464
MOE 110...125V AC/DC 066465
MOE 220...250V AC/DC 066466
MOE - Motor operator MOE 380...440V AC 066467
MOE 480...525V AC 066468
Electronic stored energy motor operator MOE-E

Type 1SDA…R1
MOE-E 24V DC 066469

MOE-E 48...60V DC 066470
MOE-E 110...125V AC/DC 066471
MOE-E 220...250V AC/DC 066472
MOE-E - Electronic motor MOE-E 380...440V AC 066473
operator
MOE-E 480...525V AC 066474
7/49
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories
Rotary Handles
Rotary Handles
Type 1SDA…R1
RHD Normal Direct Handle 069053 066476
RHD Direct Emergency Handle 069054 066478
RHE Normal Transmitted Handle 069055 066480
RHE Emergency Transmitted Handle 069056 066482
Direct handle
RHS L Normal Left Lateral Handle 069058
RHS L Emergency Left Lateral Handle 069059
RHS R Normal Right Lateral Handle 069060
RHS R Emergency Right Lateral Handle 069061
RHE_B Base for Transmitted Handle 069057 066484
Transmitted handle LH Wide Normal Handle 066583
LH Wide Emergency Handle 066585

Type 1SDA…R1
IP54 protection for transmitted handle -RHE- 066587
IP54
Locks

Type 1SDA…R1

Fixed padlock
7/50
1SDC210033D0201
Type 1SDA…R1

Type 1SDA…R1


Type 1SDA…R1

MOL-S Ronis key lock open, same Type B keys 066631
MOL-M Key lock against manual operation 066634
Front for FLD locks

Type 1SDA…R1
Front for FLD locks 066635 066636
Front for locks
Type 1SDA…R1
MIR-H 066637
MIR-V 066638
Plate XT2 F 066641
Interlock
Plate XT4 F 066645
7/51
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA…R1
4 poles
RC Sel 067131
RC Sel
Type 1SDA...R1
RCQ020/A 115-230V AC 065979

RCQ020/A 415V AC 065980
Installation

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
KIT DIN50022 066653 066653
DIN Guide
Terminals
Insulating Terminal Covers

Type 1SDA…R1
3 poles 4 poles
Terminal cover
Sealable screws for Terminal Covers

Type 1SDA…R1
2 pcs
Kit with two sealable screws 066672
Sealable screw
Phase Separators
Type 1SDA…R1
4 pcs 6 pcs
PB Height 25mm 069062 069063
PB Height 100mm 066675 066680
PB Height 200mm 066677 066682
Phase separators
7/52
1SDC210033D0201
Terminals
Type 1SDA…R1
EF Extended front terminals 066877 066878 066879 066880
EF Terminal
+ ADP
FC Cu Terminals for Cu cables 066917 066918 066919 066920
FCCuAl Terminal
R Rear adjustable Terminals 066949 066950 066951 066952
Type 1SDA…R1
Ekip Display 068659 068659
Ekip LED Meter 068660 068660
Ekip Com 068661 068662
Ekip Display PR212/CI Contactor control unit 050708 050708
EP010 Interface module 059469 059469
HMI030 Interface on front of panel 063143 063143
Ekip LED Meter

CT External neutral
Type 1SDA…R1

CT Neutro eesterno da 100A 066977
Kit of Electronic trip unit auxiliary Voltage

Type 1SDA…R1
KIT of 24V DC auxiliary voltage for electronic trip units 066980 066981
KIT for PTC Connection 066982 066983
KIT for Ext NE Connection 066984 066985
KIT for PR212/CI Connection 066986 066987
Test and Configuration Unit

Type 1SDA…R1
Ekip TT - Trip Test Unit 066988

Ekip T&P - Programming and test Unit 066989
Ekip T&P unit
7/53
1SDC210033D0201
Accessories

Type 1SDA...R1
ATS021 065523
ATS022 065524
ATS021
Spare parts
Type 1SDA…R1
SA RC Sel - Opening solenoid of the residual current 067209 067210
device
AUX-C -Loose cabled Auxiliary Contact 250V AC(1) 066994 066995
AUX-C -Loose cabled Auxiliary Contact 24V DC(1) 066996 066997
(1)
un-numbered cables
Fixed Part Connector for Withdrawable

Type 1SDA…R1
1 connector for fixed part/moving part of withdrawable with 2 PINS for SOR/UVR up to 400V 067213
1 connector for fixed part/moving part of withdrawable with 3 PINS for AUX up to 400V 067214
Fixed/Moving part connector

for withdrawable

Type 1SDA...R1
Fixed/ Fixed/ With- With-
Plug-in Plug-in drawable drawable
Flange Large flange for circuit-breaker 068641 068642
Flange for MOE/MOE-E/FLD 068649 068649 068650 068650
Flange for direct handle RHD 068651 068651 068652 068652
Flange for residual current RC Sel 066647 066648
7/54
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Index
Circuit-breaker.........................................................................................................................8/2
Performance Parameters ........................................................................................................8/4
Releases and Protections........................................................................................................8/6
Motor protection......................................................................................................................8/9
Communication .....................................................................................................................8/10
Standards and Regulations ...................................................................................................8/11
Symbols.................................................................................................................................8/12
ABB SACE documentation....................................................................................................8/13
8/1
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Circuit-breaker
G1.1 Circuit-breaker
Mechanical switching apparatus, able to close, carry and break currents in normal short-
circuit condition and also close, carry for a specified time and break currents in specific
abnormal circuit conditions such as that verified in case of short-circuit.
G1.2 Non-automatic circuit-breaker (switch-disconnector)

Mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the specified re-
quirements for the isolating function.
G1.3 Current-limiting circuit-breaker

Circuit-breaker with a break time short enough to prevent the short-circuit current from
reaching the peak value it would otherwise reach.
G1.4 Rate of contact wear

Percentage of contact wear. Indicatively shows the state of electrical life of the circuit-break-
er contacts.
G1.5 Double insulation

all the circuit-breakers in the SACE Tmax XT family have double insulation between the active
power parts and the front parts of the apparatus where the operator works during normal
plant service, so as to prevent the risk of contact with live parts. Each electrical accessory is
completely segregated from the power circuit, and particularly the control assembly, which is
completely isolated from the energised circuits. Moreover, the circuit-breaker has redundant
insulation between both the internal live parts and the connection terminal area. The dis-
tances between connection terminals are greater than those required by the IEC Standards
and conform to those established by the American regulations (UL 489 Standard).
G1.6 Positive operation

The operating lever always indicates the exact position of the circuit-breaker moving contacts:
Q red line (I): Closed position;
Q green line (O): Open position;
Q yellow-green line: Trip position, open following tripping by the releases or test pushbutton.
The signals are precise and reliable, in compliance with the requirements established by the
IEC 60073 and IEC 60417-2 Standards.
When the releases trip, the moving contacts automatically open and the lever moves to the
Trip position; to reclose the circuit-breaker the latter must be reset by pushing the operating
lever from the trip position to the Open position. From this position is possible re-closing the
circuit-breaker.
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism is the free trip type and acts regardless of the pres-
sure put on the lever or the speed of the operation.
G1.7 Isolation behaviour

Characteristic of a mechanical switching device which, in the open and trip position, carries
out a disconnection function and provides a sufficient insulating distance (distance between
contacts) to guarantee safety.
G1.8 Electromagnetic compatibility

In accordance with the IEC 60947-2 Standard (Annex B + Annex F, European Directive
N° 89/336) concerning EMC electromagnetic compatibility, the Tmax family circuit-breakers
used with electronic trip units and residual current releases are guaranteed for operation in
the presence of interference caused by:
Q electromagnetic equipment;
Q atmospheric disturbance (static) flowing through the electrical networks;
Q interference from radio waves;
Q electrostatic discharges.
Moreover, the circuit-breakers do not generate disturbe to the other electronic devices situ-
ated in the vicinity of the installation site is generated.
8/2
1SDC210033D0201
G1.9 Tropicalization
All the Tmax XT series circuit-breakers can be used in the most critical environmental condi-
tions defined by the following standards:
Q IEC 60721-2-1 (climatogram 8);
Q IEC 60068-2-30;
Q IEC 60068-2-2;
Q IEC 60068-2-52.
Tropicalization is guaranteed by:
Q moulded-case made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fiber;
Q rust-preventive treatment on the main metal parts;
Q Fe/Zn galvanisation (UNI ISO 2081), protected by a conversion layer free of hexavalent
chrome (in compliance with ROHS) with the corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520
class 2c;
Q application of anti-condensation protection for electronic trip units and relative accessori-
es.
G1.10 Resistance to impact and vibrations

In compliance with IEC 60068-2-6 standards and with the regulations established by the
most important classification bodies (RINA, Det Norske Veritas, Bureau Veritas, Lloyd’s Reg-
ister of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd, ABS and the Russian Maritime Register of Shipping),
all the Tmax circuit-breakers are unaffected by mechanically and electromagnetically gener-
ated vibrations.
G1.11 Degree of protection (IP)

The IP degree of protection indicates the level of protection of a device against contacts with
live parts and penetration of foreign bodies of the liquid and solid type.
8/3
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Performance Parameters
G2.1 Size
Term that indicates a group of circuit-breakers with phisical dimension common to a nominal
current size (same poles number).
G2.2 Rated uninterrupted current (In)

The rated uninterrupted current for a circuit-breaker is the current value, that the circuit-
breaker can carry during uninterrupted service.
G2.3 Rated service current (Ie)

Current value defined by the manufacturer, which takes into account the rated service volt-
age at the rated frequency, the rated service, the utilisation category and the type of protec-
tive casing, if any.
G2.4 Rated service voltage (Ue)

The rated service voltage of a device is the voltage value which, along with the rated current
value, determines the use of the device itself and which the applicable tests and utilisation
category refer to.
G2.5 Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

The rated insulation voltage of a device is the voltage value to which the dielectric tests and
surface insulation distances refer. In no case may the rated service voltage value exceed the
rated insulation voltage.
G2.6 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

Peak value of an impulse voltage of given shape and polarity that the device can withstand
without faults under specified test conditions and to which the insulation clearances refer.
G2.7 Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu)

The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit-breaker is the value of the
short-circuit current the circuit-breaker is able to break twice (according to the O – t – CO
cycle) at the corresponding rated operating voltage. The circuit-breaker is not required to
carry its rated current after the opening and closing cycle.
G2.8 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics)

The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit-breaker is the current value the
circuit-breaker is able to break three times according to a cycle of opening, pause and clos-
ing operations (O - t - CO - t - CO) at a given rated service voltage (Ue) and at a given power
factor. After this cycle, the circuit-breaker must be able to carry its rated current.
G2.9 Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)

The rated short-time withstand current is the current value the circuit-breaker can carry in
the closed position for a short time under specified conditions of service and behaviour. The
circuit-breaker must be able to carry this current for as long as the established delay time
lasts so as to guarantee selectivity among circuit-breakers installed in series.
G2.10 Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm)

The rated short-circuit making capacity of a device is the value, declared by the manufacturer,
that coincides with the rated service voltage, the rated frequency and with a specified alter-
nating current power factor or direct current time constant. It is expressed as the maximum
peak value of the prospective current under specified conditions.
G2.11 Utilisation category of circuit-breakers

The utilisation category of a circuit-breaker must be established according to whether it is
specifically designed to achieve selectivity by means of an intentional delay or not, in relation
to other devices installed in series on the load side, under short-circuit conditions.
It’s possible to distinguish two user classes:
Class A - Circuit-breakers not specifically designed for selectivity under short-circuit condi-
tions in relation to other protection devices installed in series on the load side, i.e. without
intentional delay, applicable in short-circuit conditions and, therefore, without specification of
the short-time withstand current.
8/4
1SDC210033D0201
Class B - Circuit-breakers specifically designed for selectivity under short-circuit conditions
in relation to other protection devices installed in series on the load side, i.e. with an inten-
tional delay (which can be adjusted), applicable under short-circuit conditions. The short-
time withstand current is specified for these circuit-breakers (Icw).
A circuit-breaker belongs to category B if its Icw value exceeds:
Q between 12In and 5kA, whichever is higher, for In≤2500A;
Q 30kA for In>2500A.
G2.12 Utilisation category of non-automatic circuit-breakers

The utilisation category of non-automatic circuit-breakers establishes the type of condition
of use.
It is identified by two letters, which indicate the type of circuit in which the device may be
installed (AC for alternating current and DC for direct current), a two-digit number for the type
of load that can be controlled and an additional letter (A or B), which indicates the operating
frequency.
With reference to the utilisation categories, the product Standard establishes the current val-
ues the switch-disconnector must be able to break and interrupt under abnormal conditions.
The utilisation categories of non-automatic circuit-breakers are listed in the table below:
Nature Utilisation categories

of the Utilisation category
current Frequent Infrequent Typical applications
operation operation
AC-20A AC-20B Connection and disconnection under no-load conditions
Alternating AC-21A AC-21B Connection and disconnection under no-load conditions
current AC-22A AC-22B Resistive load operation including moderate overloads
Mixed resistive and inductive load operation including
AC-23A AC-23B
moderate overloads
DC-20A DC-20B Operation of motors or other highly inductive loads
Direct DC-21A DC-21B Operation of resistive loads including moderate overloads
current Mixed resistive and inductive load operation including a
DC-22A DC-22B
moderate overload (e.g. motors with shunt)
DC-23A DC-23B Operation of highly inductive loads
G2.13 Electrical life

The electrical life of a device indicates the number of on-load operating cycles and the resist-
ance of the contacts to electrical wear under the conditions specified in the relative product
Standard.
G2.14 Mechanical life

The mechanical life of a device indicates the number of no-load operating cycles (each
operating cycle consists of a closing and opening operation) the device is able to carry out
without overhauls or replacement of mechanical parts (routine maintenance is allowed).
G2.15 Dissipated power

This is the loss, caused by the joule effect, due to the electrical resistance of the circuit-
breaker poles; the energy lost is dissipated in heat.
G2.16 Utilisation categories for operating parts

The utilisation categories given in the table are considered to be standard (CEI EN 60947-5-1).
Type of current Class Typical applications

Control of resistive loads and electronic loads with insulation obtained
AC-12
by use of optoinsulators
AC AC-13 Control of electronic loads with insulation transformer
AC-14 Control of small electromagnetic loads (≤72VA)
AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (>72VA)
Control of resistive loads and electronic loads with insulation obtained
DC-12
by use of optoinsulators
DC
DC-13 Control of electromagnets
DC-14 Control of electromagnetic loads with economiser resistors in the circuit
8/5
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Releases and Protections
G3.1 Release
Device, mechanically connected to a mechanical operating device, which frees the latching
components and allows the operating device to be opened or closed.
G3.2 Thermomagnetic trip unit

Thermomagnetic trip units use a bimetal and an electromagnet to detect respectively over-
loads and short-circuits. They are suitable for protecting both alternating and direct current
networks.
G3.3 Magnetic only trip unit

Device for protection against short-circuits which provides a higher magnetic trip threshold
than the one available with a thermomagnetic circuit-breaker. The magnetic only release
is better able to deal with any problems concerning the particularly high current the motor
absorbs during the first instants of its starting phase.
G3.4 Electronic trip unit

Releases connected to current transformers (three or four, depending on the number of
conductors to be protected) which, installed inside the circuit-breaker, provide the double
function of supplying the power able to operate the release correctly (self-supply) and de-
tecting the value of the current that passes through the live conductors. They are therefore
only compatible with alternating current networks.
The signal from the transformers is processed by the electronic part (microprocessor), which
compares it with the threshold settings. When the signal exceeds the thresholds, circuit-
breaker release is controlled by means of an opening solenoid, which acts directly on the
circuit-breaker control unit.
If there is an auxiliary power supply in addition to self-supply, the voltage value must be
24V DC ±20%.
G3.5 Residual current release

Device able to detect the earth fault current by means of a toroidal transformer which in-
cludes all the live conductors, as well as the neutral if distributed.
Residual current releases can be used in conjunction with the circuit-breaker to obtain two
main functions in one single device:
Q protection against overloads and short-circuits;
Q protection against indirect contacts (voltage on conductive parts owing to loss of insula-
tion).
G3.6 Magnetic protection

Protection against short-circuits with instantaneous trip.
G3.7 Thermal protection

Protection against overloads with inverse long-time delayed trip.
G3.8 Protection against Overloads (L)

Protection against overloads with long inverse time delay trip even with the trip curve estab-
lished by the IEC 60255-3 Standard. Used in coordination with fuses and medium voltage
protections.
G3.9 Protection against instantaneous short-circuit (I)

Provides instantaneous protection against short-circuits.
G3.10 Protection against delayed short-circuit (S)

Provides protection against short-circuit currents with delayed intervention at fixed time or
inverse short time. Thanks to the delay setting, this device is particularly suitable when selec-
tive coordination must be achieved among the various different devices.
G3.11 Protection against earth faults (G)

Protection against earth faults with delayed fixed time of trip.
G3.12 Residual current protection (IΔn)

This function is particularly suitable when residual current protection is required for protection
against indirect contacts.
8/6
1SDC210033D0201
G3.13 Protection of the neutral
Detection of overcurrents in the neutral conductor so as to break the phase conductors
(neutral protected but not isolated) or to break the neutral conductor itself (neutral protected
and isolated).
G3.14 Distribution systems

The distribution system establishes the status of the neutral in the power supply system and
the method for connecting the conductive part towards earth.
The Italian standard, CEI 64-8/3 (which is aligned with the IEC 60364-3 international Stand-
ard), classifies electrical systems with a combination of two letters. The first indicates the
situation of the power supply system towards earth:
Q T direct earth connection of an alternating current point, generally the neutral;
Q I earth insulation, or earth connection of a point, generally the neutral, by means of an
impedance.
The second letter gives the situation of the conductive parts of the electrical installation in
relation to the earth:
Q T conductive parts directly earthed;
Q N conductive parts connected to the earthing point of the power supply system.
Other letters may follow which indicate the arrangement of the neutral and protection con-
ductors:
Q S neutral and protection functions carried out by separate conductors;
Q C neutral and protection functions carried out by a single conductor (PEN conductor).
The main distribution systems used are illustrated below with reference to these definitions.
G3.15 TT system
In the TT system, the neutral and conductive parts are connected to two electrically inde-
pendent earthing systems.

G3.16 TN system
In the TN system, the neutral is connected directly to the earth, while the conductive parts
are connected to the same earthing system as the neutral.
The TN system is divided into three different types, depending on whether the neutral and
protection conductors are separate or not:
1. TN-S: the neutral conductor N and the protection conductor PE are separate

8/7
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Releases and Protections
2. TN-C: the neutral and protection functions are combined in a single conductor called
PEN

3. TN-C-S: the neutral and protection functions are partly combined in a single conductor
called PEN and partly separate PE+N

Consult QT3: “Distribution systems and protection against indirect contacts and earth faults” for further details.
G3.17 IT system
IT system have no active parts directly earthed, but may have live parts connected to earth
through high value impedance. All the exposed-conductive-parts, separately or in group, are
connected to an independent earth electrode.

8/8
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Motor protection
G4.1 Protection against phase unbalance and phase loss (U)

Protection function which acts if unbalance between the current values of the individual
phases protected by the circuit-breaker is detected (according to IEC 60947 annex T).
G4.2 Rotor lock protection (R)

The function protects motor from possible damages caused by rotor stopping during func-
tioning.
G4.3 Starting current

Is the current value which, in accordance with the CEI EN 60947-4-1 Standard, is assigned
a value of about 7.2xIe. It represents the current required by the motor during the starting
phase, and which persists throughout the starting time.
G4.4 Starting time

This is the time the motor takes to reach its rated running speed. The starting time depends
on the characteristics of the load the motor must drive, and particularly on the type of motor.
G4.5 Operating class

The starting classes distinguish the thermal relays according to their trip curves. The fol-
lowing table (which refers to the most common applications) lists the classes defined in the
IEC60947-4-1 Standard.
Trip time
Trip time
Operating class Ti [s] for 7.2xIr
Ti [s] for 7.2xIr
(banda “E”)
2 – Ti ≤ 2
3 – 2 < Ti ≤ 3
5 0,5 < Ti ≤ 5 3 < Ti ≤ 5
10A 2 < Ti ≤ 10 –
10 4 < Ti ≤ 10 5 < Ti ≤ 10
20 6 < Ti ≤ 20 10 < Ti ≤ 20
30 9 < Ti ≤ 30 20 < Ti ≤ 30
40 – 30 < Ti ≤ 40
Time Ti is the cold trip time of the thermal relay at 7.2 times the set current value. It is com-
mon practice to associate class 10 with the normal starting type and class 30 with the
heavy-duty starting type.
The other trip classes and trip time indicated under band “E”, have recently been introduced
in a variant to the CEI EN 60947-4-1 Standard, and are characterised by a more restricted
trip range due to raising the minimum non-trip time.
(*)
The load characteristics which the motor must carry, the type of motor and the starting methods, are factors which affect the
starting time and therefore selection of the thermal trip unit.
G4.6 Contactor
Mechanical operating device with a single stand-by position and non-manual operation able
to make, carry and break currents under normal circuit conditions, including overload oper-
ating conditions.
G4.7 Utilisation category of the contactor

The Standard establishes different utilisation categories for the contactor. Each category de-
fines precise minimum performance values (e.g. application range or rated breaking capac-
ity) according to current, voltage, power factor or time constant values and test conditions
specified in the Standard.
G4.8 PTC
Thermostatic probe able to measure the internal temperature of an electric motor.
Consult QT7: The asynchronous three-phase motor, general information and ABB offer for coordinating the protections” for further details.
8/9
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Communication
G5.1 Communication protocol

Specification of standardized dialogue among several digital devices which exchange data.
It is an operating mode based on the structure or length of binary words that must be com-
mon to all the elements that exchange data. Communication without dialogue protocol is not
possible.
G5.2 Modbus RS485

This is a basic communication protocol, one of the most widespread standards in industrial
automation and power distribution spheres.
G5.3 Network
A network generically consists of nodes interconnected with communication lines:
Q the node (an “intelligent” device able to dialogue with other devices) is the data transmis-
sion and/or reception point;
Q the communication line is the element that connects two nodes and represents the direct
path the information takes in order to be transferred between two nodes. In practice, it
is the physical means (coaxial cable, twisted telephone cable, optic fibre, infrared rays)
along which the information and data travel.
G5.4 Bus network

The bus network structure is based on a common transmitting means (usually a twisted
cable or coaxial cable) for all the nodes connected, therefore in parallel.
Consult QT9: “Communication with ABB circuit-breakers via Bus” for further details.
8/10
1SDC210033D0201
Glossary
Standards and Regulations
G6.1 Standards
Technical specification approved by a recognised organisation with the task of defining the
state-of-the-art characteristics (dimensional, environmental, safety, etc.) of a product or
service.
G6.2 Directive
Ensemble of rules which define the essential requirements regarding safety which the prod-
ucts must comply with in order to guarantee user safety.
G6.3 Naval Register

A Body able to certify a product/service as conforming to the regulations/criteria fixed inter-
nationally by the International Maritime Organization. The certification issued confirms that a
ship is authorised to carry out the activity it was designed for.
G6.4 RoHS Directive

European Directive 2002/95/EC of 27 January 2003 (Decree Law 25 N° 151 of July 2005)
aimed at eliminating or reducing the use of dangerous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment. It requires manufacturers and companies to adapt to the relative provisions and
to compile a manufacturer’s declaration, without certification by third parties.
G6.5 CE marking
This is a mark that must be affixed to certain types of product by the manufacturer in order to
self-certify correspondence (or conformity) with the essential requirements for marketing and
use of that product in the European Union. The law requires this mark to be affixed on the
product so that it can be marketed in the European Economic Area (EEA) member states.
8/11
1SDC210033D0201
Symbols
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
CB Circuit-breaker
PF Fixed part
PM Mobile part
F Version Circuit-breaker in fixed version
P Version Circuit-breaker in plug-in version
W Version Circuit-breaker in withdrawable version
F Front terminals
EF Front extended terminals
ES Front extended spread terminals
FCCuAl Terminal for copper/aluminium cables
FCCu Terminal for copper cables
R Rear terminals
HR/VR Rear flat vertical/horizontal terminals
FB Terminals for flexible busbars
MC Multi-cable terminal
HTC High terminal covers
LTC Low terminal covers
PS Phase separators
RHD Direct rotary handle
RHE Transmitted rotary handle
RHE-LH Transmitted rotary handle with wide handgrip
RHS Lateral rotary handle
FLD Front for locks
PLL Padlock device
KLC Key lock
SOR or YO Shunt opening release
PS-SOR or YO Permanent shunt opening release
UVR or YU Undervoltage release
UVD Time-delay device for undervoltage release
AUX Q Auxiliary contact in open/closed position
AUX SY Auxiliary contact tripped
AUX S51 Release tripped auxiliary contact
SA Opening solenoid of residual current device
AUP-I Plugged-in auxiliary position contacts
AUP-E Withdrawn auxiliary position contacts
AUE Early auxiliary contacts on the handle
MOD Direct action motor operator
MOE Stored energy motor operator
MOE-E Electronic motor operator
CB Circuit-breaker
NE External neutral
RHx All the handles (RHD, RHE, RHE-UI, RHS)
3Q Left open/closed auxiliary contacts
24V 24V auxiliary voltage
AUE inside Early auxiliary contacts inside the circuit-breaker
8/12
1SDC210033D0201
ABB SACE documentation
The technical documentation is available on-line on BOL web site http://bol.it.abb.com in “Work
tools - Technical guides” section:
– Technical Application Paper, volume 1 “Low voltage selectivity with ABB circuit-breakers”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 2 “MV/LV transformer substations: theory and example
of short-circuit calculation”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 3 “Distribution system and protection against indirect
contact and earth fault”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 4 “ABB circuit-breakers inside LV switchboards”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 5 “ABB circuit-breakers for direct current applications”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 6 “Arc-proof low voltage switchgear and controlgear
assemblies”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 7 “Three-phase asynchronous motors. Generalities and
ABB proposals for the coordination of protective de-
vices”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 8 “ Power factor correction and harmonic filtering in elec-
trical plants”
– Technical Application Paper, volume 9 “Bus communication with ABB circuit-breakers”
8/13
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
Notes
1SDC210033D0201
SACE Tmax XT. New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A
Contact us
ABB SACE The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve
1SDC210033D0201 – 03/2010 – 7.000 – CAL

the right to modify the contents of this document on the
A division of ABB S.p.A. basis of technical development of the product, without
L.V. Breakers prior notice.
Via Baioni, 35 © Copyright 2010 ABB.

24123 Bergamo All rights reserved.
Phone: +39 035.395.111

Fax: +39 035.395.306-433
www.abb.com
Technical catalogue - Preliminary
SACE Tmax XT
New low voltage moulded-case
circuit-breakers up to 250 A

Slo Abb Rupnieciskie Automatsledzi Serija Tmax XT PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Slo Abb Rupnieciskie Automatsledzi Serija Tmax XT PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Slo Abb Rupnieciskie Automatsledzi Serija Tmax XT PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SACE Tmax XT.

New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A

1SDC210033D0201 – 03/2010 – 7.000 – CAL

Via Baioni, 35 © Copyright 2010 ABB.

Phone: +39 035.395.111

Technical catalogue - Preliminary

The SACE Tmax XT Ranges 2

Characteristic Curves and

ABB SACE is proud to present you the result of a long and

New SACE Tmax XT. Simply XTraordinary.

Here are the 4 new SACE Tmax XT frames for you:

Welcome a totally renewed, high-performing and versatile range

Regulations and Reference Standards....................................................................................1/5

Identiﬁcation of the SACE Tmax XT circuit-breakers ..............................................................1/6

Total opening time

65 85 100 150 200 50 85 65 85 100 150 200

65 85 100 150 200 50 85 65 85 100 150 200

Q impact and vibration resistance(G1.10);

Q versatility of the installation. It is possible to mount the circuit-breaker in horizontal, vertical, or

Altitude 2000m 3000m 4000m 5000m

Q different degrees of protection IP (International Protection)(G 1.11);

Conformity with Standards

Company Quality System

Environmental Management System, Social Responsibility and Ethics

The commitment to environmental protection becomes concrete through:

1 Name of the circuit-breaker and performance level(*)

Magnetic trip units

Thermomagnetic trip units

Electronic trip units

Residual Current Protection Devices

Circuit-breakers for power distribution

Main characteristics ................................................................................................................2/3

Thermomagnetic trip units ......................................................................................................2/5

Electronic trip units..................................................................................................................2/7

Circuit-breakers for motors protection

Main characteristics ..............................................................................................................2/11

Magnetic trip units.................................................................................................................2/13

Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/14

Circuit-breakers for generator protection

Main characteristics ..............................................................................................................2/18

Circuit-breakers for oversized neutral protection

Main characteristics ..............................................................................................................2/22

Main characteristics ..............................................................................................................2/24

400Hz installations ................................................................................................................2/25

The SACE Tmax XT family of moulded-case circuit-breakers can be equipped with:

Characteristics of Electronic trip units SACE Tmax XT

Characteristics of circuit-breakers for power distribution

Example with XT3 250A

Rotary switch for thermal

Example with XT4 250A

Rotary switch for magnetic Rotary switch for thermal

I protection LED Power-on LED

Dip switch for I protection Test Connector

Slot for lead seal

Q self-supply from 0.2xIn minimum current up.

Dip switch for the trip curve selection

L, S, I protection LED Test Connector

Slot for lead seal

L, S, I, G protection LED Power-on LED